JP2017079972A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which allows a player to enjoy a movable performance using a shutter, and suppresses reduction of an amusement of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine comprises: a pair of a back rear left base 3420 and a back rear right base 3520 which can be moved between an approach position where the bases approach each other and a separation position where the bases are separated from each other, with a main performance display unit being interposed between the approach position and the separation position; a back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and a back rear right slide drive motor 3566 for moving the bases; plural back rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and plural back rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 which are rotatably attached to the front surfaces of the pair of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 in an arranged state in an arc-state; a rotation connection mechanism for connecting the adjacent back rear left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorative body 3510 so as to transmit rotation; and a back rear left drive motor and a back rear right drive motor for rotating the back rear left rotation decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 173

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to receive a gaming medium in which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the gaming area, and a gaming medium in the gaming area. Receiving entrances (general winning entrances, starting entrances, variable winning entrances (variable starting entrances, large winning entrances, bonus winning entrances, etc.), V winning entrances, etc.). Then, the player can be provided with a privilege (a game medium is paid out, an advantageous gaming state such as the opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening is advantageous to the player), and the player can be entertained. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image in the center of the front view in the game area, and the effect image is displayed by displaying the effect image according to the progress of the game. The image also makes the player entertained and makes it difficult for the player to get bored.

  As this type of gaming machine, one having a pair of shutters that open and close in front of the effect display means has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique of this patent document 1, in a normal state, the pair of shutters are separated and opened, and the display screen of the effect display means is made visible from the player side, thereby producing the effect by the effect display means. You can entertain images. On the other hand, according to the progress of the game (game state), the pair of shutters are approached and closed, and the display screen of the effect display means is made invisible from the player side. It can suggest changes, the arrival of opportunities, etc., and can increase expectations for games.

  However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, only the shallow relief-like decoration is applied to the surface of the shutter, and the shutter decoration does not change. Therefore, when performing an effect using the shutter, the shutter is closed. After that, opening the shutter and switching to the effect using the effect image by the effect display means, the movable effect is only a movement that the shutter opens and closes, it is a simple movable effect, and some players get bored early As a result, there was a problem that it was not possible to enjoy the movable production and the interest in the game was lowered.

JP 2014-108258 A

  Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of a player in a game by making a movable effect using a shutter more enjoyable.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“The game area where the game is played,
Effect display means arranged in the center of the game area in front view and capable of displaying effect images;
On the front side of the effect display means, the game area is opposed to each other with the center of the game area in between, and the approach position positioned in front of the effect display means close to the center of the game area when viewed from the front A pair of shutters that are each independently movable between the separation position located outside the effect display means away from the center of the effect display means,
An opening / closing drive means for moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position according to a game state that is changed by a game being performed in the game area;
A decorative body main body formed in a three-dimensional manner, and a shaft portion that protrudes outward coaxially from a portion facing the back of the decorative body main body, and the shaft portions are adjacent to each other. A plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters so that each of the shaft portions can rotate in a state of being arranged in a non-linear manner,
In each of the pair of shutters, a universal joint coupling the shaft portions adjacent to each other of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row so as to be able to transmit rotation,
Rotation drive means that is attached to each of the pair of shutters and rotates the shaft portion of at least one of the decorative bodies in each of the pair of shutters according to the gaming state " It is characterized by being.

  Here, as “game”, “a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is performed, and the game media to the specific entrance is placed. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific entrance for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game media. `` Games to be struck '', `` Games to be struck by game media aiming at the entrance to which benefits including payout of game media are given '', `` Multiple games each with multiple designs provided with multiple games A game in which the rotation of each of the revolving bodies is stopped so that a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of game media is given after the revolving bodies are rotated, etc. can be cited.

  In addition, the “game area” in which the game is performed includes “a plurality of entrances to which a game medium is thrown in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. `` Areas that are in play '', `` Each is equipped with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's starting operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stopping operation '' The area | region where the some rotating body to which the privilege including payout | payout of a game medium is provided according to this is arrange | positioned "etc. are mentioned.

  “Production display means” include “liquid crystal display (LCD)”, “cathode ray tube (CRT) display device (CRT)”, “plasma display”, “laser display”, “LED display device”, “organic” EL display device "," electronic paper display device ", and the like.

  Furthermore, as the “shutter”, “the length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position is formed so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display means”, “approach position” The length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the position and the separation position is such that the length fits within the display screen of the effect display means ”,“ When the pair of shutters are moved to the approach positions, “The effect display means is partially visible from the front side”, “When the pair of shutters are moved to the approach positions, the effect display means cannot be seen from the front side”, and the like. Further, the “shutter” may not be decorated on the front surface, or may be decorated on the front surface. Further, the pair of shutters may be opposed in the left-right direction, may be opposed in the up-down direction, or may be opposed in an oblique direction.

  In addition, as “depending on the game state”, “games to the entrances arranged in the game area (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, an accessory prize opening, a V prize opening, etc.) "According to the receipt of the medium", "According to the fact that the game medium circulating in the game area has passed a specific area (for example, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.)" “According to the result of special lottery drawn by accepting game media at the entrance (for example, start port)”, “Lotted by accepting game media at the entrance (eg, start port) arranged in the game area” Depending on the type of production for suggesting the special lottery result (for example, reach production, jackpot production, loss production, etc.) "," multiple with multiple designs each triggered by the introduction of game media According to the rotation of the rotating body, " Triggered by the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotator after rotating a plurality of rotators each having a plurality of symbols each triggered by “ "According to the amount of insertion", "according to the length of the insertion blank of the game medium to be inserted into the game area", and the like.

  Examples of the “open / close drive means” and “rotation drive means” include “drive motor”, “rotary solenoid”, “solenoid”, “piston & cylinder”, and the like.

  In addition, “decorative bodies” include “things that mimic items that match the gaming machine concept”, “things that have a logo that matches the gaming machine concept”, and “characters that follow the gaming machine concept”. And the like ". Moreover, the decorative body may have translucency or may not have translucency.

  Examples of the “non-linear shape” include “arc shape”, “C shape”, “U shape”, “V shape”, “zigzag shape”, and the like. In addition, as the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, “the cores of the respective shaft portions of the plurality of decorative bodies are on the same plane parallel to the surface of the game area”, “multiple decorative bodies The axis of each shaft portion in the body is on the same plane with respect to the surface extending in a direction different from the surface of the game area ”,“ the shaft core of each shaft portion in the plurality of decorative bodies is , Those not on the same plane ”, and the like.

  In addition, the “universal shaft joint” includes “a pair of arm portions protruding from the end portions of the shaft portion and the arm portion of the other shaft portion between the arm portions, And a cross-shaped spider with a transmission portion projecting from a pair of arm portions projecting from the end portions of the respective shaft portions, and a cross mounted rotatably on each arm portion. And the like (so-called universal joint), “constant velocity shaft joint”, “rubber tube joint”, “spring joint”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is arranged in the gaming area where the game is performed, in the center of the gaming area in the front view, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image, and the front side of the effect display means The game area is opposed to each other with the center of the game area in between, the approach position located near the center of the front view game area and located in front of the effect display means, and away from the center of the game area and outside the effect display means. A pair of shutters, each of which is movable independently between the separated positions and the pair of shutters, and the pair of shutters, according to a gaming state that changes as a game is performed within the gaming area, Opening and closing drive means for moving each between the separation positions, a three-dimensional decorative body main body, and a shaft portion that protrudes outward coaxially from the back-facing portion of the decorative body main body With A plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters so that the respective shaft portions can be rotated in a state where the shaft portions are arranged in a non-linear manner so that the shaft portions are adjacent to each other; In each, it is attached to each of a pair of shutters and a universal shaft joint that connects adjacent shaft portions of a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row so as to be able to transmit rotation, and depending on the gaming state Rotation driving means for rotating the shaft portion of at least one decorative body in each of the pair of shutters.

  Thereby, the display screen of the effect display means arranged on the rear side between the pair of shutters is visually recognized from the front (player side) by setting the pair of shutters in the separated positions. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image by the effect display means. In this state, since the pair of shutters are positioned on both outer sides of the effect display means, the outer sides of the effect display means are decorated with a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters. It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area, and to make the gaming machine that attracts the player's attention strongly. Then, when the pair of shutters are moved from the separation position to the approach position by the opening / closing driving means in accordance with the gaming state that changes as the game is performed in the gaming area, the pair of shutters are displayed on the display screen of the effect display means, respectively. In addition to blocking the effect image by being positioned in front of the player, the position of the decorative object moves to the center of the front-view game area, so that the player's interest can be attached to a pair of shutters or each shutter. It is possible to strongly attract a plurality of decorative bodies, and to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the expectation for the game. Then, in a state where the pair of shutters is moved to the approach position, one of the plurality of decorative bodies that are rotatably attached to the front surface of each shutter via the shaft portion by the rotation driving means. When the shaft portion is rotated, the decorative body main body from which the shaft portion protrudes rotates around the shaft core of the shaft portion, and at the same time, adjacent to the decorative body whose shaft portion is rotated by the rotation driving means. Because the adjoining shaft parts are connected by a universal joint so that the shaft parts adjacent to each other can transmit rotation, the rotation of the shaft part can be transmitted even if the direction in which the shaft part extends is different, The adjoining decorative body will also rotate. From this, similarly, the other decorative bodies in which the shaft portions are connected by the universal shaft joints are also sequentially rotated, and a plurality of directions in which the rotating shafts extend differ by being arranged in a non-linear manner. The decorative body can be simultaneously rotated by the rotation driving means, and the shaft core of each shaft portion extends along the surface of the shutter. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative bodies are stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, Therefore, the part facing the front of the decorative body main body formed is changed, and the appearance of the decorative body seen from the player side can be changed. Therefore, after moving the pair of shutters to the approach position, rotating the plurality of decoration bodies to change the appearance of the decoration body seen from the player side, the pair of shutters moves to the approach position and closes However, with a pair of shutters, it is possible to continue to show a movable effect by a plurality of decorative bodies, making it difficult for the player to get bored by multi-stage effects, and by rotating a plurality of decorative bodies, the player's A sense of expectation for a game can be further increased, and a player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means while the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, the decorations on both sides of the effect display means by the plurality of decorative bodies can be changed (changed). Therefore, the appearance in the game area can be greatly changed, the player's interest is strongly attracted and it is difficult to get bored, and the appeal in the player can be improved by changing the appearance in the game area It is possible to make it easier for a player who is selecting a gaming machine to play to select this gaming machine.

  Further, the pair of shutters can be moved by the opening / closing driving means, respectively, and each can be independently moved between the approach position and the separation position, so that only one of the pair of shutters is approached. Move between a position and a separation position, move a pair of shutters simultaneously in a direction opposite to each other between an approach position and a separation position, or simultaneously move a pair of shutters between an approach position and a separation position Or move in the direction. In addition, since each of the pair of shutters is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies and rotation driving means, the rotation driving means is provided at any position between the approach position and the separation position. Thus, a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated.

  Therefore, various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the movement of the pair of shutters by the opening / closing drive means and the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective shutters by the rotation drive means. It is possible to make the player less tired and to make the movable effect using the shutter more enjoyable, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the player's game.

  Further, since a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated by the rotation driving means, it is not necessary to provide each decoration body with a rotation driving means, and the space required for the rotation driving means can be reduced as much as possible. The space required for the plurality of decorative bodies can be made relatively wide. Therefore, for example, since the space of the decorative body can be relatively widened, the rotation range of the decorative body can be increased to make the movement more enjoyable, or the decorative body can be made larger and conspicuous. Or increase the impact when rotating by increasing the number of decorations, so that the effects of multiple decoration movements and decorations can be further enhanced, and entertain the player Decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pair of shutters are moved by the opening / closing driving means according to the gaming state, or the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the shutters are opened and closed (the plurality of decorative bodies are entirely ) And multiple decorative objects can be rotated to attract the player's interest to the shutter and multiple decorative objects. Moving effects by moving the shutter and rotating multiple decorative objects It is possible to entertain the player and to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, for example, a gaming machine is provided with a receiving port (so-called starting port) for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player by receiving a gaming medium like a pachinko machine. In the case where a predetermined effect is executed in order to suggest to the player the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium at the entrance, the movement of the shutter and a plurality of decorative bodies are performed during the predetermined effect. By showing a movable effect due to the rotation of the player, it is possible to make the player think that a special lottery result (for example, “big hit”) in which an advantageous gaming state occurs has been drawn, and expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, because of the effects as described above, it is attached to a pair of shutters that can be suitably used for a gaming machine that produces an effect suggesting a special lottery result, such as a pachinko machine, and each shutter. An effect unit including a plurality of decorative bodies can be provided.

  In addition, it is desirable to arrange a plurality of decorative bodies on the same surface of each shutter, with the shaft core of each shaft portion parallel to the front surface of the shutter. As a result, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in such a manner that the shaft cores of the respective shaft portions are on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter, so that the front-rear direction necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of decorative bodies is arranged. The depth can be reduced, and a plurality of decorative bodies can be surely arranged on the front side of the shutter, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be provided. In addition, since the depth of the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be relatively enlarged, or other members (for example, effect display means, game panel, center) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter. Can be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the effect display means), and attracts the player's attention. Can be a gaming machine.

  Further, the effect display means is a quadrilateral whose outer shape in front view is horizontally long, and the length of the pair of shutters in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separation position is set to the outer shape of the effect display means. You may make it form longer than the short side. As a result, the size (length) of the shutter straddles the display screen of the effect display means. Therefore, when the shutter is moved to the front side of the effect display means, the portion covered by the shutter becomes wide, and the shutter is produced. The impact on the player when moved to the front side of the display means can be increased, and the player can be more entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Further, when the length of the shutter is a length straddling the effect display means, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are supported to be movable between the approach position and the separation position, the shutter is supported to be movable. A guide member (for example, a slide shaft, a slide guide, a slide rail, etc.) will be arranged outside the effect display means in a front view, and the guide image can be made difficult to obstruct the effect image. It is possible to entertain the production image for the player.

  Moreover, you may make it attach the decorative cover which covers the front side of a universal shaft coupling and a rotation drive means to the front surface of a shutter. Thereby, the decorative cover can hide the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means from the player side, and the appearance of the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means can be reduced to reduce the appearance in the game area. Can do. In addition, when a decorative cover that hides the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means is provided, the decorative area can decorate the game area and the front surface of the shutter, so that the player can enjoy the game with a good appearance.

  Further, a decorative substrate having light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies is attached to each of the pair of shutters. You may make it have. As a result, when the light emitting means provided on the decorative board is caused to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be illuminated and decorated, and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the decorative body can be made conspicuous and Interest can be attracted strongly, and it can make a player think that there is something, and can raise the expectation for a game. In this case, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate emits light in a state where the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the orientation of the decorative body main body formed in three dimensions by the rotation is changed. The refraction, reflection direction, transmission amount, etc. of the light radiated from the light emitting means to the front decoration body will change gradually, making the decoration body appear to blink and entertain the player. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the decorative board having the light emitting means is provided in each of the pair of shutters, the light emitting means of the decorative board is moved with the pair of shutters moved to the approach position by the opening / closing driving means. When the light is emitted, the player can be shown a light-emitting decoration with a brightness that is clearly different from the effect image of the effect display means, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. Further, in this case, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is caused to emit light while the shutter is moved to the approach position and the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, the plurality of decorative bodies blinks in front of the effect display means. Because it is possible to show the player a movable light-emitting effect, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Further, a plurality of decorative bodies may be arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the game area in front view. Thus, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separation position, the plurality of decorative bodies follow the outer periphery of the game area. Thus, the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated to improve the appearance of the gaming machine. In addition, when a plurality of decorative bodies respectively attached to the front surfaces of a pair of shutters are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, the pair of shutters are moved to an approach position or moved to a separation position. By doing so, it is possible to reduce or increase the diameter of an imaginary ring formed by a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc. Therefore, when the pair of shutters are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies is reduced, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters are moved from the approach position to the separation position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies increases, so that the player's interest can be directed toward the outer periphery of the game area.

  Further, when a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, for example, the end portions of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the game area move forward. When each of them is rotated, the player can show a movable effect that flows forward from the center of the game area, and the player can be given an illusion that the wind is blowing. Alternatively, if each of the decorative bodies is rotated so that the end portions facing the center of the game area move backward, the player can show a movable effect that flows backward from the center of the game area. It is possible to make the player have an illusion of being sucked into the game area. Therefore, by moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position, or by rotating a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape, the player's interest is directed toward the center of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the universal shaft joint protrudes from the end of each shaft portion with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in each shaft portion connected, and the width in the circumferential direction is a gap. The arm portion of the other shaft portion is inserted into the gap between the pair of arm portions formed narrower and the pair of arm portions in one shaft portion, and is surrounded by four arm portions. It may be configured by a spider having four transmission portions protruding in a rod shape from the inner side to between the arm portions. As a result, when one shaft portion is rotated, the spider transmission portion comes into contact with the side surface of the arm portion, and further, the transmission portion comes into contact with the side surface of the arm portion in the other shaft portion. The rotation can be transmitted to the other shaft portion. Further, even when one shaft portion and the other shaft portion extend in different directions, rotation can be transmitted between the shaft portions through the transmission portion of the spider as described above. . At this time, the plurality of transmission parts of the spider are maintained so that the surfaces passing through the centers of the plurality of transmission parts of the spider coincide with the plane including the bisector of the corner of the central axis of the two shaft parts. However, it slides relatively in the direction in which the arm portions extend between the arm portions. Thus, since it can connect so that rotation may transmit between two axial parts, a universal shaft coupling can be embodied and the effect mentioned above can be show | played reliably.

  Further, when the universal shaft joint is composed of a pair of arm portions projecting from the respective shaft portions connected to each other and a cross-shaped spider inserted between the respective arm portions, the spider is Since the rotation is transmitted via the rubber, it is possible to eliminate the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring compared to the case where the rotation is transmitted using the rubber and the spring. A plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated simultaneously. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate at the same time. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies with a sense of unity, and to suppress a decrease in interest. Also, in this case, the transmission part of the spider is connected between the side parts of the arm part of one shaft part and the side part of the arm part of the other shaft part so that rotation can be transmitted between the two shaft parts. As a universal shaft joint can be assembled, the number of parts can be reduced and the time and effort required for assembly can be reduced compared to the case where a universal joint or constant velocity shaft joint is adopted as a universal shaft joint. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the gaming machine.

  Further, a rotation drive mechanism may be further provided for rotating the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row by transmitting the drive from the rotational drive means to the shaft portion of the decorative bodies at least every other one. . As a result, in the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotational drive means is transmitted to the shaft portion of the decorative bodies positioned at least every other from the end via the rotational drive mechanism. Since it is made to rotate, in a plurality of decorative bodies sequentially connected by a universal shaft joint, it is possible to reduce accumulation of backlash and twist in the rotation direction of the universal shaft joint. Therefore, since the time lag of the rotation of the decorative body rotated through the universal shaft joint can be made as small as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are substantially simultaneously It is possible to rotate, give a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of a plurality of decorative bodies, and can sufficiently exhibit the effect of moving effects by the plurality of decorative bodies, reliably exhibiting the above-described operational effects It can be a gaming machine. Further, in this case, the shafts of the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by driving from the rotation driving means via the rotation driving mechanism. In other words, the shaft portion of the plurality of decorative bodies is rotated by one rotation driving means, and since there is no need to provide a plurality of rotation driving means, a space for that can be secured, so It is possible to widen the space of the decorative body and increase the rotation range of the decorative body to make the movement more enjoyable, make the decorative body larger and stand out, or increase the number of decorative bodies Can increase the impact when rotating and rotate, and can further enhance the effects of the movement and decoration of multiple decorative bodies, to entertain the player and suppress the lowering of interest in the game Can do.

  Moreover, when it is made to provide the rotational drive mechanism mentioned above, it is desirable to connect the axial part adjacent to the axial part rotated by a rotational drive mechanism with a universal shaft coupling. Thereby, since the shaft part rotated by the rotation drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft part are connected by the universal shaft joint, the shaft parts that cannot be rotated by the rotation drive mechanism are adjacent to each other. Since the part is not connected by the universal shaft joint, rotation is transmitted from both sides to the decorative body sandwiched between two decorative bodies whose shaft is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. Can be prevented, and the rotation of the decorative body can be avoided from jerky. Accordingly, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated substantially simultaneously without any sense of incongruity, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the above-described rotation drive mechanism is provided, the rotation drive mechanism meshes with the rotation gear in the form of a bevel gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body and the rotation gear from the rear side, and extends forward and backward. A transmission gear member including a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion that is attached to the base so as to be rotatable around a shaft, and a transmission mechanism that is attached to the base by rotating the transmission gear member by driving of the driving means. It is desirable that Accordingly, the rotation drive mechanism that rotates the shaft portion of the decorative body by driving from the rotation drive means includes a rotation gear that is attached to the shaft portion, and a transmission gear member that includes a transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotation gear from the rear side. Since the transmission gear member is constituted by a transmission mechanism that rotates by driving from the drive means, the rotation drive mechanism can be embodied, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be provided. it can. Further, in this case, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending in parallel with the surface of the game area (the surface extending in the vertical and horizontal directions), and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear is installed from the rear side of the rotary gear. The transmission gear member can be rotated about the shaft extending in the front-rear direction by meshing the portions, and the transmission gear member is rotated by transmitting the drive from the driving means via the transmission mechanism. Since the gear and pulley for transmitting the rotation can be rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction in the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. . Therefore, since a space can be secured before and after the plurality of decorative bodies, even if the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surface of the shutter, it is possible to make it difficult to come into contact with other members, and a game that exhibits the above-described effects. The machine can be easily realized. Moreover, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction in the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased. The decorative body can stand out. Or a some decoration body can be arrange | positioned also in the position where the depth is narrow, and the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a some decoration body (shutter) can be raised.

  In the above-described rotational drive mechanism, the transmission gear member is further provided with a spur gear-like driven gear portion at the rear end, and the transmission mechanism is meshed with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. A working rack gear may be provided and attached to the shutter so as to be slidable along the surface of the shutter, and may have a rod-like driving rack that is slid by the rotational driving means. Thereby, when the rod-shaped drive rack is slid along the surface of the shutter by the rotation drive means, the transmission gear member can be rotated via the driven gear portion meshing with the operation rack gear of the drive rack, The decorative body can be rotated together with the shaft portion via the rotation gear meshed with the transmission gear portion of the transmission gear member, and the gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized with certainty. Further, in this case, since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-like drive rack, the rotary drive means can be selected from a plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. It can arrange | position in the position which is not conspicuously distant as much as possible, and can make a some decorative body stand out relatively.

  In addition, a turning table having a slightly smaller diameter than the outer periphery of the gaming area in front view and rotating around an axis extending back and forth around the effect display means according to the gaming state, a pair of shutters on the front side of the turning table And an opening / closing drive means may be attached. Thereby, by rotating the turning table, the moving direction (opening / closing direction) of the pair of shutters moving between the approach position and the separation position can be freely set like the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the diagonal direction. The effect display means can be opened and closed from various directions. Further, in this case, by rotating the turning table, the position where the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front side of each shutter can be changed in various ways, so that the decoration (appearance in the game area) ) Can be changed, and a gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be obtained. In this case, various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the movement (opening / closing) of the pair of shutters, the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies, and the rotation of the turning table. It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
“The plurality of decorative bodies are
In each of the shutters, the axis of each of the shaft portions is disposed on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter in each shutter.

  As a result, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged along the front surface of the shutter, it becomes possible to reduce the depth in the front-rear direction necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of decorative bodies. A plurality of decorative bodies can be reliably arranged, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be provided. In addition, since the depth of the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be relatively enlarged, or other members (for example, effect display means, game panel, center) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter. Can be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the effect display means), and attracts the player's attention. Can be a gaming machine.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
“The effect display means
The external shape of the front view is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and
The pair of shutters is
The length in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position is longer than the short side of the outer shape of the effect display means.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the effect display means has a rectangular shape whose front view is a horizontally long shape, and the length in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position in the pair of shutters, It is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the effect display means.

  As a result, the size (length) of the shutter straddles the display screen of the effect display means. Therefore, when the shutter is moved to the front side of the effect display means, the portion covered by the shutter becomes wide, and the shutter is produced. The impact on the player when moved to the front side of the display means can be increased, and the player can be more entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the length of the shutter is set to straddle the effect display means, for example, when the both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are supported so as to be movable between the approach position and the separation position, the movement is possible. A supporting member (for example, a slide shaft, a slide guide, a slide rail, etc.) to be supported is arranged outside the effect display means in a front view, and the guide image can be made difficult to disturb the effect image. It is possible to entertain the effect image to the player in the state.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“It further includes a decorative cover that is attached to the front surface of the shutter and covers the front side of the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means”.

  According to the structure of the means 4, the game machine is further provided with a decorative cover that is attached to the front face of the shutter and covers the front side of the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means.

  Thereby, the decorative cover can hide the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means from the player side, and the appearance of the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means can be reduced to reduce the appearance in the game area. Can do. In addition, since the decorative cover for hiding the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means is provided, the decorative area can decorate the game area and the front surface of the shutter, so that the player can have a good appearance and entertain the player.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
“It further includes a decorative substrate that is attached to each of the pair of shutters and includes a light emitting means that can emit light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies,
The decorative body is
It has a light-transmitting property ”.

  Here, as the “light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “incandescent lamp”, “fluorescent lamp”, “organic EL”, “neon lamp”, “cold cathode tube” And the like. Further, the light emitting means may be a wide angle type having a wide light irradiation range, or a narrow angle type having a narrow light irradiation range.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the decoration board, which is attached to each of the pair of shutters in the gaming machine and includes a light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front rather than the plurality of decoration bodies, Furthermore, after making it prepare, a decorative body is made to have translucency.

  As a result, when the light emitting means provided on the decorative board is caused to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be illuminated and decorated, and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the decorative body can be made conspicuous and Interest can be attracted strongly, and it can make a player think that there is something, and can raise the expectation for a game.

  Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is caused to emit light while the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the direction of the three-dimensional decorative body main body is changed by the rotation. The direction of refraction and reflection of light irradiated on the front decorative body, the direction of transmission, etc. will change gradually, making it appear as if the decorative body is blinking, entertaining and entertaining the player The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative board is caused to emit light while the pair of shutters are moved to the approach position by the opening / closing driving means, the player is shown a light emitting decoration with a brightness clearly different from the effect image of the effect display means. Therefore, the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. In addition, when the shutter is moved to the approach position and a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light, the movable light emitting effect that the plurality of decorative bodies blinks in front of the effect display means Can be shown to the player, so that the player can think that there is something good, and a sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced to prevent a decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“The plurality of decorative bodies are
It is arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the game area in front view.

  Here, as an arc in which a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged, a line connecting one end of the arc and the center of the arc, a line connecting the other end of the arc and the center of the arc, However, it is desirable that the intersecting angle be in the range of 60 degrees to 150 degrees. This is because if the angle is smaller than this range, a plurality of decorative bodies may appear to be arranged in a straight line. In addition, if the angle is larger than this range, one decorative body must be made small to be a part of the ring, and the decorative body may be difficult to stand out. This is because there is a possibility that it may not appear as if they are arranged in an arc shape.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape so as to be centered on the center side of the game area in front view.

  Thus, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separation position, the plurality of decorative bodies follow the outer periphery of the game area. Thus, the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the plurality of decorative bodies respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, the pair of shutters are moved to the approach position or separated from each other. Or the like, the diameter of a virtual ring formed by a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape can be reduced or increased. Therefore, when the pair of shutters are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies is reduced, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters are moved from the approach position to the separation position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies increases, so that the player's interest can be directed toward the outer periphery of the game area.

  Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, for example, the end portions of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the game area move forward. When each of them is rotated as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that flows from the center of the game area to the front, and the player can have an illusion that the wind is blowing. Alternatively, if each of the decorative bodies is rotated so that the end portions facing the center of the game area move backward, the player can show a movable effect that flows backward from the center of the game area. It is possible to make the player have an illusion of being sucked into the game area.

  Therefore, by moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position, or by rotating a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape, the player's interest is directed toward the center of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
“The plurality of decorative bodies are
When the pair of shutters are in the approach position, they are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center of the game area.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centered on the center of the game area when the pair of shutters are in the approach position.

  As a result, when the pair of shutters are moved to the approach position, a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective front surfaces are arranged in an annular shape, so that the player's interest is strongly directed toward the center of the game area. It is possible to achieve the above-described effects.

Means 8: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
"The universal shaft joint is
Each of the connected shaft portions protrudes from the end of each shaft portion with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference spaced from the center, and the circumferential width is narrower than the gap. A pair of arm portions,
The arms from the inside surrounded by the four arm portions in a state where the arm portions of the other shaft portion are respectively inserted into the gaps of the pair of arm portions in the one shaft portion. It is composed of a spider having four transmission parts protruding in a rod shape between the parts.

  By the way, when a rubber tube joint is used as a universal shaft joint, the rubber may be deteriorated. When a spring joint is used, depending on the spring constant, a time lag is likely to occur in the transmission of rotation, and the sense of unity of rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies may be impaired. Further, when a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint is used, the mechanism is complicated, so that it takes time to assemble and there is a risk that the cost increases.

  According to the structure of the means 8, the universal shaft joint protrudes from the end portion of each shaft portion with the same clearance in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in each of the shaft portions connected to each other. In the state where the arm portion of the other shaft portion is inserted into the gap between the pair of arm portions whose width in the direction is narrower than the gap and the pair of arm portions in one shaft portion, respectively. And a spider having four transmission portions protruding in a rod shape from the inside surrounded by the two arm portions to each other between the arm portions.

  As a result, when one shaft portion is rotated, the spider transmission portion comes into contact with the side surface of the arm portion, and further, the transmission portion comes into contact with the side surface of the arm portion in the other shaft portion. The rotation can be transmitted to the other shaft portion. Further, even when one shaft portion and the other shaft portion extend in different directions, rotation can be transmitted between the shaft portions through the transmission portion of the spider as described above. . At this time, the spider's four sides are kept so that the planes passing through the centers of the four transmission parts of the cross-shaped spider coincide with the plane including the bisector of the corner of the central axis of the two shafts. The two transmission portions slide relative to each other in the direction in which the arm portions extend between the arm portions. Thus, since it can connect so that rotation may transmit between two axial parts, a universal shaft coupling can be embodied and the effect mentioned above can be show | played reliably.

  In addition, since the rotation is transmitted through the spider, the rotation transmission time lag due to expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber or spring is reduced compared to the case where the rotation is transmitted using a rubber or spring. It can be eliminated and a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated simultaneously. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate at the same time. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies with a sense of unity, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, a free shaft that connects the spider's transmission section between the two shaft sections so as to transmit rotation only by sandwiching the transmission section of the spider between the side surfaces of the arm section of one shaft section and the arm section of the other shaft section. Since joints can be assembled, the number of parts can be reduced and the time and effort required for assembly can be reduced compared to the case where a universal joint or constant velocity shaft joint is adopted as a universal shaft joint. An increase in cost can be suppressed.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 8,
“Rotation for transmitting the drive from the rotation driving means to the shaft portion of the decoration body at least every other plurality of the decoration bodies attached to the shutter and arranged in a row. It further comprises a drive mechanism ”.

  Here, as the “rotation drive mechanism”, “the bevel gear-shaped rotation gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body and the rotation gear meshed with the rotation gear from the rear side and rotatable around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A transmission pulley having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear (transmission gear member) and a gear mechanism that rotates the transmission gear by being driven by the rotation driving means "," Rotary pulley attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body " And a driving pulley that is rotated by the rotational driving means on the rear side of the decorative body, and a belt that is wound around the driving pulley and the rotating pulley. ”,“ Attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body And a transmission gear that meshes with the rotation gear from the rear side and is rotated by the rotation driving means ”.

  By the way, a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row are sequentially connected to each other by a universal shaft joint, and a shaft portion of the decorative body located at one end is rotated by a rotation driving means. In such a case, since the universal shaft joint has a certain amount of rattling and twisting with respect to the rotation direction, the rotation transmission is accumulated through the universal shaft joint, and the rattling and twisting in the rotation direction is accumulated. A time lag occurs at the timing at which the ornament at the other end, to which the rotation is transmitted via the plurality of universal shaft joints, rotates with respect to the ornament at one end rotated through the shaft portion by the rotation driving means. Therefore, there is a possibility that the sense of unity of the movement (rotation) of the plurality of decorative bodies becomes poor, and the effect of the movement cannot be fully exhibited.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the game machine is caused to transmit the drive from the rotation driving means to the shaft portion of the decoration body at least every other decoration body attached to the shutter and arranged in a row. A rotation driving mechanism for rotating is further provided.

  As a result, in the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotational drive means is transmitted to the shaft portion of the decorative bodies positioned at least every other from the end via the rotational drive mechanism. Since it is made to rotate, it is possible to reduce accumulation of backlash and torsion in the rotational direction of the universal shaft joint. Therefore, since the time lag of the rotation of the decorative body rotated through the universal shaft joint can be made as small as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are substantially simultaneously It is possible to rotate, give a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of a plurality of decorative bodies, and can sufficiently exhibit the effect of moving effects by the plurality of decorative bodies, reliably exhibiting the above-described operational effects It can be a gaming machine.

  In addition, the shafts of the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by driving from the rotation driving means via the rotation driving mechanism. In other words, the shaft portion of the plurality of decorative bodies is rotated by one driving means, and since there is no need to provide a plurality of rotation driving means, the space for that can be ensured. It becomes possible to widen the space of the decorative body, increase the rotation range of the decorative body to make the movement more enjoyable, make the decorative body larger and stand out, and increase the number of decorative bodies In addition to being able to increase the impact when rotated, it is possible to further enhance the effects of the movement and decoration of a plurality of decorative bodies, to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game it can.

  Further, since the rotation driving mechanism transmits the drive from the rotation driving means to rotate the shaft portion of the decorative body, the rotation driving mechanism arranges the rotation driving means at positions away from the plurality of decoration bodies. This makes it possible to make the rotation drive means less noticeable and relatively easily make a plurality of decorative bodies stand out, so that the player can enjoy decoration and movement (rotation) of the plurality of decorative bodies. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 10: In the constitution of means 9,
"The universal shaft joint is
The shaft portion that is adjacent to the shaft portion rotated by the rotation driving mechanism is connected.

  By the way, in the plurality of decorative bodies sequentially connected by the universal shaft joint, for example, when the shaft portions of two separate decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation drive mechanism, the shaft portions are rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. Since at least one ornamental body is arranged between the two ornamental bodies connected by a universal shaft joint, the ornamental body arranged between the two ornamental bodies rotated by the rotation drive mechanism Then, the rotation from both sides is transmitted through the universal shaft joint. And, as described above, since the universal joint has a backlash and a twist with respect to the rotation direction, if there is a time lag in the rotation transmitted from both sides, the rotation of the decorative body becomes jerky, There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable and the effects of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies cannot be fully exhibited.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the shaft portion that is adjacent to the shaft portion that is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism is connected by the universal shaft joint.

  Thereby, since the shaft part rotated by the rotation drive mechanism and the adjacent shaft part are connected by the universal shaft joint, the shaft parts that cannot be rotated by the rotation drive mechanism are adjacent to each other. Since the part is not connected by the universal shaft joint, rotation is transmitted from both sides to the decorative body sandwiched between two decorative bodies whose shaft is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism. Can be prevented, and the rotation of the decorative body can be avoided from jerky. Accordingly, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated substantially simultaneously without any sense of incongruity, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 11: In the constitution of means 9 or means 10,
"The rotational drive mechanism is
A bevel gear-shaped rotating gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body;
A transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion meshed with the rotating gear from the rear side at the front end, and being attached to the shutter so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction;
The transmission gear member includes a transmission mechanism that is rotated by driving of the rotation driving means and is attached to the shutter ”.

  Here, the “transmission mechanism” includes a “spur gear-like driven gear portion provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member, and an operating rack gear extending in a predetermined direction meshing with the driven gear portion. , A drive rack that is slidably attached to the base and is slid by the drive of the rotary drive means ”,“ a spur gear-like driven gear portion provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member; A spur gear-like drive gear that is rotated by the drive of the rotation drive means, and at least a spur gear shape that is rotatably attached to the base by transmitting rotation from the drive gear to the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. A transmission gear, a driven pulley provided at the rear end of the transmission gear member, a driving pulley rotated by a rotational driving means, a driving pulley and a driven Those with a belt that is wound around the over Li, a ", and the like.

  According to the structure of the means 11, the rotation drive mechanism has a bevel gear-shaped rotation gear attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body and a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion meshed with the rotation gear from the rear side at the front end. A transmission gear member that is attached to the shutter so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a transmission mechanism that is attached to the shutter by rotating the transmission gear member by driving of the rotation driving means. It is what I did.

  Accordingly, the rotation drive mechanism that rotates the shaft portion of the decorative body by driving from the rotation drive means includes a rotation gear that is attached to the shaft portion, and a transmission gear member that includes a transmission gear portion that meshes with the rotation gear from the rear side. Since the transmission gear member is constituted by a transmission mechanism that rotates by driving from the rotation driving means, it is possible to embody the rotation driving mechanism and provide a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects. Can do.

  Also, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending parallel to the shutter surface, and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion is engaged from the rear side of the rotary gear to extend the transmission gear member back and forth. The transmission gear member is rotated by transmitting the drive from the rotation driving means to the transmission gear member via the transmission mechanism, so that the transmission mechanism can be rotated by a gear or pulley for transmitting the rotation. Can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since a space can be secured before and after the plurality of decorative bodies, even if the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surface of the shutter, it is possible to make it difficult to come into contact with other members, and a game that exhibits the above-described effects. The machine can be easily realized.

  Moreover, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction in the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased. The decorative body can stand out. Or a some decoration body can be arrange | positioned also in the position where the depth is narrow, and the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a some decoration body (shutter) can be raised.

Means 12: In the constitution of means 11,
"The transmission gear member is
A spur gear-like driven gear portion is further provided at the rear end, and
The transmission mechanism is
A rod-shaped drive rack provided with an operating rack gear meshing with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member, slidably mounted along the surface of the shutter, and slidable by the rotation driving means; It is characterized by having "

  Here, examples of the rod-shaped “drive rack” include “straightly extending”, “circularly extending”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the transmission gear member further includes a spur gear-like driven gear portion at the rear end, and the transmission rack gear meshes with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member. And a rod-shaped drive rack that is slidably mounted on the shutter along the surface of the shutter and that is slid by the rotational drive means.

  Thereby, when the rod-shaped drive rack is slid along the surface of the shutter by the rotation drive means, the transmission gear member can be rotated via the driven gear portion meshing with the operation rack gear of the drive rack, The decorative body can be rotated together with the shaft portion via the rotation gear meshed with the transmission gear portion of the transmission gear member, and the gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized with certainty.

  Since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-shaped drive rack, the rotary drive means can be separated as much as possible from the plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. It can arrange | position in the position which is not conspicuous, and can make a some decoration body stand out relatively.

Means 13: In the gaming machine,
“The game area where the game is played,
An effect display means that is arranged in the center of the game area in front view and has an outer shape formed in a horizontally long quadrilateral and capable of displaying an effect image,
On the front side of the effect display means, the game area is opposed to each other with the center of the game area in between, and the approach position positioned in front of the effect display means close to the center of the game area when viewed from the front Each of them can be moved independently between the separation position located outside the effect display means and away from the center of the display, and in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position. A pair of shutters whose length is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the effect display means;
An opening / closing drive means for moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position according to a game state that is changed by a game being performed in the game area;
A decorative body main body formed in a three-dimensional manner, and a shaft portion that protrudes outward coaxially from a portion facing the back of the decorative body main body, and the axis of each of the shaft portions is Arranged on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter, and in a circular arc centered on the center of the gaming area when the pair of shutters are in the approach position so that the shaft portions are adjacent to each other In a state of being arranged, each of the shaft portions is rotatably attached to the front surface of each of the pair of shutters, and a plurality of decorative bodies having translucency,
A decorative board that is attached to each of the pair of shutters and includes a light emitting means capable of emitting light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies;
Of the two shaft portions of the decorative body that are arranged alternately with respect to the plurality of decorative bodies, the shaft is attached to the shaft portion adjacent to the shaft portion of the other decorative body. A bevel gear-shaped rotating gear, a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion meshing with the rotating gear from the rear side, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear portion at the rear end, A transmission gear member rotatably attached to the shutter around an extended axis; and an operating rack gear meshing with the driven gear portion of the transmission gear member, the shutter being slidable along the surface of the shutter A rotary drive mechanism comprising a transmission mechanism having a rod-like drive rack attached to
Rotation drive means that slides the drive rack in the transmission mechanism of the rotation drive mechanism according to the gaming state and is attached to each of a pair of the shutters;
The shaft portions adjacent to the shaft portion to which the rotating gear is attached are connected to each other so as to be able to transmit rotation to each other, and each of the connected shaft portions has a circumferential direction on a circumference spaced from the center A pair of arm portions projecting from the end portions of the respective shaft portions with the same gap therebetween, the circumferential width being narrower than the gap, and the pair of arm portions in one of the shaft portions In the state where the arm portion of the other shaft portion is inserted into each of the gaps, the rod portion protrudes in a rod shape from the inside surrounded by the four arm portions to each other between the arm portions. A universal joint composed of a spider having four transmission parts,
It is attached to the front surface of the shutter, and includes a decorative cover that covers the universal shaft joint and the front surface side of the rotation driving means ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine is arranged in the center of the gaming area where the game is played and the gaming area in the front view, and the outer shape of the front view is formed in a horizontally long square, The effect display means capable of displaying the image, and the front side of the effect display means, facing each other with the center of the game area in between, and approaching the center of the front view game area and positioned in front of the effect display means Each position can be moved independently from the center of the game area and away from the effect display means, and the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approaching position and the separating position. The length of the pair of shutters formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the effect display means, and the pair of shutters, the approach position according to the gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area And away Opening / closing drive means for moving each of them, a three-dimensional decorative body main body, and a shaft portion coaxially protruding outward from the back-facing portion of the decorative body main body When the pair of shutters are close to each other so that the shaft cores of the respective shaft portions are arranged on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter and the shaft portions are adjacent to each other, A plurality of decorative bodies having translucency and a pair of shutters, each shaft portion being rotatably attached to the front surface of each pair of shutters in a state of being arranged in an arc shape as a center. Each of the decorative board and the decorative board having light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the rear side to the front side of the plurality of decorative bodies, and arranged alternately with respect to the plurality of decorative bodies. Among the two shaft parts of the decorative body that is next to the shaft part of the other decorative body A spur gear-like driven gear portion having a bevel gear-shaped rotating gear attached to the shaft portion on the side being operated, a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion meshing from the rear side with the rotating gear, and a spur gear-like driven gear portion A transmission gear member that is attached to the shutter so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and an operation rack gear that meshes with a driven gear portion of the transmission gear member, along the surface of the shutter. The rotary drive mechanism having a transmission mechanism having a rod-shaped drive rack that is slidably attached to the shutter, and the drive rack in the transmission mechanism of the rotary drive mechanism are slid according to the gaming state, and the pair of shutters The rotation driving means attached to each of the shafts and the shafts adjacent to the shafts to which the rotation gears are attached are connected to each other so as to be able to transmit rotation to each other. A pair of arm portions projecting from the end portions of the respective shaft portions with the same gap in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center, and having a circumferential width narrower than the gap, and one of the arm portions In a state where the arm portion of the other shaft portion is inserted into the gap between each of the pair of arm portions in the shaft portion, in a rod shape from the inside surrounded by the four arm portions to each of the arm portions. A universal shaft joint comprising a spider having four projecting parts projecting, and a decorative cover attached to the front surface of the shutter and covering the front side of the universal shaft joint and the rotation drive means. It is a thing.

  Thereby, the display screen of the effect display means arranged on the rear side between the pair of shutters is visually recognized from the front (player side) by setting the pair of shutters in the separated positions. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image by the effect display means. In this state, since the pair of shutters are positioned on both outer sides of the effect display means, the outer sides of the effect display means are decorated with a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters. It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area, and to make the gaming machine that attracts the player's attention strongly. Then, when the pair of shutters are moved from the separation position to the approach position by the opening / closing driving means in accordance with the gaming state that changes as the game is performed in the gaming area, the pair of shutters are displayed on the display screen of the effect display means, respectively. In addition to blocking the effect image by being positioned in front of the player, the position of the decorative object moves to the center of the front-view game area, so that the player's interest can be attached to a pair of shutters or each shutter. It is possible to strongly attract a plurality of decorative bodies, and to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the expectation for the game. Then, when the rotation driving means is driven in a state where the pair of shutters are moved to the approaching positions, every other one of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape on the front surface of each shutter is arranged. A transmission gear member having a transmission gear portion meshed with a rotation gear attached to a shaft portion of the decorative body is rotated via a transmission mechanism such as a drive rack, and the rotation gear is attached. The decorative body body (decorative body) from which the shaft portion projects via the shaft portion rotates around the shaft core of the shaft portion, and at the same time is adjacent to the shaft portion to which the rotating gear is attached. Since the shaft is connected to the shaft by a universal shaft joint so that the rotation can be transmitted, the rotation of the shaft can be transmitted even if the direction in which the shaft extends is different. The decorative body that is rotating That. As described above, the rotation from the rotation driving means is transmitted to the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row through the rotation driving mechanism, and the rotation is transmitted through the adjacent shaft portions. Since the decorative body in between is rotated, a plurality of decorative bodies having different rotation directions can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational driving means by being arranged in an arc shape by one rotational driving means. In addition, since the axis of each shaft portion extends along the surface of the shutter, when a plurality of decorative bodies are stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, the three-dimensional decorative body main body faces the front. Therefore, the appearance of the decorative body that can be seen from the player side can be changed. Therefore, after moving the pair of shutters to the approach position, rotating the plurality of decoration bodies to change the appearance of the decoration body seen from the player side, the pair of shutters moves to the approach position and closes However, with a pair of shutters, it is possible to continue to show a movable effect by a plurality of decorative bodies, making it difficult for the player to get bored by multi-stage effects, and by rotating a plurality of decorative bodies, the player's A sense of expectation for a game can be further increased, and a player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means while the pair of shutters are in the separated positions, the decorations on both sides of the effect display means by the plurality of decorative bodies can be changed (changed). Therefore, the appearance in the game area can be greatly changed, the player's interest is strongly attracted and it is difficult to get bored, and the appeal in the player can be improved by changing the appearance in the game area It is possible to make it easier for a player who is selecting a gaming machine to play to select this gaming machine.

  Further, the pair of shutters can be moved by the opening / closing driving means, respectively, and each can be independently moved between the approach position and the separation position, so that only one of the pair of shutters is approached. Move between a position and a separation position, move a pair of shutters simultaneously in a direction opposite to each other between an approach position and a separation position, or simultaneously move a pair of shutters between an approach position and a separation position Or move in the direction. In addition, since each of the pair of shutters is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies and rotation driving means, the rotation driving means is provided at any position between the approach position and the separation position. Thus, a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated.

  Therefore, various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the movement of the pair of shutters by the opening / closing drive means and the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective shutters by the rotation drive means. It is possible to make the player less tired and to make the movable effect using the shutter more enjoyable, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the player's game.

  In addition, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged such that the axis of each shaft portion is on the same plane parallel to the front surface of the shutter, the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged along the front surface of the shutter. Therefore, the depth in the front-rear direction necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, and the plurality of decorative bodies can be surely arranged on the front side of the shutter. A gaming machine for playing can be provided. In addition, since the depth of the plurality of decorative bodies can be reduced, the decorative body can be relatively enlarged, or other members (for example, effect display means, game panel, center) before and after the plurality of decorative bodies and the shutter. Can be placed in a narrow space (for example, between the game panel and the effect display means), and attracts the player's attention. Can be a gaming machine.

  Further, the effect display means has a rectangular shape whose front view is a horizontally long shape, and the length of the pair of shutters in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position is set to the outline of the effect display means. Since the shutter has a size (length) that spans the display screen of the effect display means, when the shutter is moved to the front side of the effect display means, The area covered by the shutter becomes wider, the impact on the player when the shutter is moved to the front side of the effect display means can be increased, and the player can be more entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Further, for example, when both ends in the longitudinal direction of the shutter are supported so as to be movable between the approach position and the separation position, guide members (for example, a slide shaft, a slide guide, a slide rail, etc.) that are supported to be movable are supported. ) Is arranged outside the effect display means in a front view, the guide image can be made difficult to prevent the effect image, and the player can enjoy the effect image in a good state.

  In addition, since the decorative cover that covers the front side of the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means is attached to the front surface of the shutter, the decorative cover hides the visibility of the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means from the player side. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance in the game area due to the visibility of the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means. In addition, since the decorative cover for hiding the universal shaft joint and the rotation driving means is provided, the decorative area can decorate the game area and the front surface of the shutter, so that the player can have a good appearance and entertain the player.

  Further, when the pair of shutters are moved to the approach position, a plurality of decorative bodies attached to the respective front surfaces are arranged in an annular shape, so that the player's interest is strongly directed toward the center of the game area. be able to. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters are moved to the separation position, a plurality of decorative bodies are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area can be decorated to improve the appearance of the gaming machine. In addition, by moving the pair of shutters to the approach position or to the separation position, the diameter of a virtual ring formed by a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape can be reduced or increased. You can do it. Therefore, when the pair of shutters are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies is reduced, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. On the other hand, when the pair of shutters are moved from the approach position to the separation position, the virtual ring formed by the plurality of decorative bodies increases, so that the player's interest can be directed toward the outer periphery of the game area.

  Further, since the plurality of decorative bodies are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the game area, for example, the end portions of the plurality of decorative bodies facing the center side of the game area move forward. When each of them is rotated as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that flows from the center of the game area to the front, and the player can have an illusion that the wind is blowing. Alternatively, if each of the decorative bodies is rotated so that the end portions facing the center of the game area move backward, the player can show a movable effect that flows backward from the center of the game area. It is possible to make the player have an illusion of being sucked into the game area. Therefore, by moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position, or by rotating a plurality of decorative bodies arranged in an arc shape, the player's interest is directed toward the center of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the light emitting means provided on the decorative substrate is made to emit light, a plurality of decorative bodies can be illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the decorative bodies can be improved, and the decorative bodies can be made conspicuous to give the player interest. Can be attracted strongly, and the player can think that there is something, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is caused to emit light while the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the direction of the three-dimensional decorative body main body is changed by the rotation. The direction of refraction and reflection of light irradiated on the front decorative body, the direction of transmission, etc. will change gradually, making it appear as if the decorative body is blinking, entertaining and entertaining the player The decrease can be suppressed. Further, when the light emitting means of the decorative board is caused to emit light while the pair of shutters are moved to the approach position by the opening / closing driving means, the player is shown a light emitting decoration with a brightness clearly different from the effect image of the effect display means. Therefore, the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area. In addition, when the shutter is moved to the approach position and a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated, when the light emitting means of the decorative substrate is made to emit light, the movable light emitting effect that the plurality of decorative bodies blinks in front of the effect display means Can be shown to the player, so that the player can think that there is something good, and a sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the universal shaft joint is composed of a pair of arm portions projecting from the respective shaft portions connected to each other and a cross-shaped spider inserted between the respective arm portions. Since rotation is transmitted, the time lag of rotation transmission due to expansion and contraction (spring constant) of rubber and spring can be eliminated compared to the case where rotation is transmitted using rubber and spring. The decorative body can be rotated at the same time. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies rotate at the same time. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the movement of a plurality of decorative bodies with a sense of unity, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the universal joint, the transmission part of the spider can be transmitted between the two shaft parts by simply sandwiching the transmission part between the arm part of one shaft part and the side surface of the arm part of the other shaft part. Because it is possible to assemble universal shaft joints to be connected, the number of parts can be reduced and the time and effort required for assembly can be reduced compared to the case where universal joints and constant velocity shaft joints are used as universal shaft joints. And an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Further, in the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, the drive from the rotational driving means is transmitted to the shaft portions of the decorative bodies that are located every other edge from the end by rotating the rotational driving mechanism. As a result, accumulation of backlash and torsion in the rotational direction of the universal shaft joint can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, since the time lag of the rotation of the decorative body rotated through the universal shaft joint can be made as small as possible, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the plurality of decorative bodies are substantially simultaneously It is possible to rotate, give a sense of unity to the movement (rotation) of a plurality of decorative bodies, and can sufficiently exhibit the effect of moving effects by the plurality of decorative bodies, reliably exhibiting the above-described operational effects It can be a gaming machine.

  Furthermore, with respect to the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row, a rotational drive mechanism is provided on the shaft portion adjacent to the shaft portion of the other decorative body among the two shaft portions of the decorative bodies arranged alternately. Since the rotary gear is attached and the shaft portion to which the rotary gear is attached and the adjacent shaft portion are connected by a universal shaft joint, the shaft portions that cannot be rotated by the rotary drive mechanism are Since the adjacent parts are not connected by the universal shaft joint, the decorative body sandwiched between the two decorative bodies whose shaft portion is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism is rotated from both sides. Transmission can be prevented, and the rotation of the decorative body can be avoided from jerky. Accordingly, when the plurality of decorative bodies are rotated by the rotation driving means, the respective decorative bodies can be rotated substantially simultaneously without any sense of incongruity, so that the effect of the rotation of the plurality of decorative bodies can be sufficiently exerted. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, a bevel gear-shaped rotary gear is attached to the shaft portion of the decorative body extending parallel to the shutter surface, and the bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion is engaged from the rear side of the rotary gear to extend the transmission gear member back and forth. By rotating the drive gear of the rod-shaped drive rack as the transmission mechanism in the driven gear portion at the rear end of the transmission gear member and sliding the drive rack by the rotation drive means. Since the transmission gear member is rotated by transmitting the drive from the rotation driving means via the transmission mechanism, the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since a space can be secured before and after the plurality of decorative bodies, even if the plurality of decorative bodies are attached to the front surface of the shutter, it is possible to make it difficult to come into contact with other members, and a game that exhibits the above-described effects. The machine can be easily realized. Moreover, since the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction in the transmission mechanism can be made as thin as possible as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of decorative bodies can be relatively increased. The decorative body can stand out. Or a some decoration body can be arrange | positioned also in the position where the depth is narrow, and the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a some decoration body (shutter) can be raised. Further, since the drive of the rotary drive means is transmitted to the transmission gear member side by the rod-shaped drive rack, the rotary drive means can be made as possible from a plurality of decorative bodies by appropriately selecting the length of the drive rack. Therefore, it is possible to place a plurality of decorative bodies relatively conspicuous.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 13,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 14, a gaming machine is a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by a player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media, and games to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  The movable effect of moving the pair of shutters by the opening / closing drive means or rotating the plurality of decorative bodies by the rotation drive means is executed when the game medium that has been driven into the game area is received at the reception port. It is desirable. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a movable effect is performed in which a pair of shutters move and a plurality of decorative bodies rotate. By making the player entertained, it is possible to make it easier to continue the game medium aiming at the entrance, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated. As a result, a pair of shutters can be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies can be rotated, so that it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact by the effects described above. The result of the special lottery that has been made can be thought of as an occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, “big hit”), and it is expected to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, by moving a pair of shutters or rotating a plurality of decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, so that the lottery special lottery result is It can be suitably used for effects (eg, reach effects) for suggesting to the player, and it can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 15: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 13,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 15, the game machine is operated by a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, the movable combination that moves a pair of shutters by the opening / closing drive means or rotates a plurality of decorative bodies by the rotation drive means is the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line. When a combination of symbols is satisfied (so-called reach), a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated as one of the effects presented to the player. . As a result, a pair of shutters move and a plurality of decorative bodies rotate, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to become a winning combination. Can do. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated, whereby a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be moved. Since the player can have a strong impact by rotating, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when stopped by a combination of specific symbols occurs (for example, “BB”) It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to generation | occurrence | production of an advantageous game state can be raised, and the fall of interest can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, the player can show a lottery internal lottery because a movable effect with a higher effect can be shown to the player by moving a pair of shutters or rotating a plurality of decorative bodies. It can be used suitably for effects for suggesting to the player, and it can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 16: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 13,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 16, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, the movable combination that moves a pair of shutters by the opening / closing drive means or rotates a plurality of decorative bodies by the rotation drive means is the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line. When a combination of symbols is satisfied (so-called reach), a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated as one of the effects presented to the player. Then, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, a pair of shutters may be moved or a plurality of decorative bodies may be rotated, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game by making the movable effect using the shutter more enjoyable.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a) It is. FIG. 48A is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 7B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of a 3rd production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in FIG.78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotary body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotation body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the 3rd production | presentation operation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decoration surface part of the decoration rotary body unit to the front, (b) is the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending (a). It is explanatory drawing seen from. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which faced the 1st decoration surface part ahead in the 3rd effect operation unit, (b) is a 2nd decoration surface part ahead in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which faced. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotary body unit in a 3rd effect operation unit. In a 3rd effect operation unit, it is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotary body unit in the state which rotated the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.93 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.97 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in Fig.97 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in Fig.97 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line | wire in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path by the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel an opaque state. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 129 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel the transparent state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball in an attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center role in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back box in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back box in a back unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering unit of the back top movable production | generation unit, and was seen from the front with the back top movable main body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering unit of the back top movable production | generation unit, and was seen from back with the back top movable main body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable main body unit of the back top movable production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable main body unit of the back top movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a backside movable production unit showing the backside movable main unit in a normal ascending position, and (b) is a backside showing in a lowered position where the backside movable main unit is rotated. It is a front view of a movable production unit. It is a front view of a back top movable body unit which shows rotation of a back top 1st rotation decoration body and revolution of a back top 2nd rotation decoration body roughly. It is a front view of a back top movable main body unit which shows a motion of a plurality of back top appearance decoration bodies and LED of a back top decoration board roughly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of a back top 2nd rotation decoration body and a back surface appearance decoration body in a back top movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of a back top 1st rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back 2nd rotation decoration body and back surface appearance decoration body following FIG. 156 according to the rotation angle of a back 1st rotation decoration body. (A) is a front view of a back movable main body unit shown together with the LEDs on the back decorative board in a state where the back first rotated decorative body is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, (b) ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands the site | part of arrow A in FIG. 158, and shows the relationship between the back upper-and-lower decoration body of an appearance position, and 2nd LED of a back-side decoration board | substrate. It is a front view of the back back movable production | presentation unit in a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable production | presentation unit into the stationary-side unit side and the turntable side, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable production | presentation unit into the stationary-side unit side and the turntable side, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the turning table side of a back rear movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the turning table side of a back rear movable production | presentation unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the turntable side of the back back movable production | presentation unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the turntable side of the back back movable production | presentation unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning structure of the turning table in a back back center movable effect unit in the front view of a back back movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows schematically turning in the counterclockwise direction of the turning table in a back back center movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the turning to the clockwise direction of the turning table in a back back center movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing turning in the clockwise direction of the turning table continued from FIG. 171; It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable production unit and the back back right movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable production unit and the back back right movable production unit in a back unit from back. The back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit are disassembled into a back rear left movable decoration body unit, a back rear right movable decoration body unit, a back rear left slide unit, and a back rear right slide unit. FIG. Rear back left movable production unit and back rear right movable production unit are disassembled into back rear left movable decorative body unit, back rear right movable decorative body unit, back rear left slide unit and back rear right slide unit and viewed from behind FIG. It is a front view of a back back left movable decoration body unit and a back back right movable decoration body unit in a back back left movable production unit in a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit in the back back left movable production unit and the back back right movable production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at back back left movable decoration body unit and back back right movable decoration body unit in back back left movable production unit and back back right movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left movable ornament body unit and the back back right movable ornament body unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left movable ornament body unit and the back back right movable ornament body unit, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left rotation decoration body of the back back left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movement decoration body unit, the back back right rotation decoration body, and the rotation connection mechanism. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left rotation decoration body of the back back left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movement decoration body unit, the back back right rotation decoration body, and the rotation connection mechanism, and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation coupling mechanism in the assembled state, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotation coupling mechanism. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of the back back left movable decoration body unit in a back back left movable production | presentation unit from the left side, (b) is a back back left movable decoration body unit in a back back left movable production | production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the member which can move from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back left rotation decoration body in the back back left movable decoration body unit of a back back left movable production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the movable member of the back back right movable decoration body unit in a back back right movable production | presentation unit, (b) is the back back right movable decoration body unit of a back back right movable decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member from the right side. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back right rotation decoration body in the back back right movable decoration body unit of a back back right movable production | presentation unit. (A) The back back left rotating decoration body and the back back right rotating decoration body in the back back left movable decoration body unit and back back right movable decoration body unit of the back back left movable decoration unit and the back back right movable decoration unit It is a front view shown in the state of the 1st production position, (b) is a front view shown in the state where the back back left rotation decoration object and the back back right rotation decoration object were rotated to the 2nd production position, (c) [Fig. 11] is a front view showing the back-rear left rotation decoration body and the back-rear right rotation decoration body rotated in the third effect position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back left slide unit and back back right slide unit in a back back left movable production unit and back back right movable production unit from the front, (b) is a back back left movable production unit and It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left slide unit and back back right slide unit in a back back right movable production | presentation unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left slide unit and the back back right slide unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left slide unit and the back back right slide unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the back back left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit by the back back left slide unit and back back right slide unit in a back back left movable presentation unit and a back back right movable production unit. (A) is a front view showing the back back left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit in the back rear left movable production unit and the back back right movable production unit in the state of normal separation, (b) The back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration unit are moved to the approach position by the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit. It is a front view shown by. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back upper movable production | presentation unit in the back rear movable production | generation unit of a back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front with the turning table, It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back upper movable production | generation unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back with the turning table. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows in a schematic structure the state which made the sub production | presentation display apparatus the retreat position furthest away from the turning center in a back back upper movable production | generation unit, (b) is a turnable position and a sub production | presentation display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which carried out in schematic structure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows in a schematic structure the state which made the sub production | presentation display apparatus the protrusion position closest to the turning center. (A) is the front view by the side of the turntable in the back back movable production | generation unit which shows the sub production | presentation display apparatus of a back back upper movable production | generation unit in the normal retreat position, (b) protrudes a sub production | presentation display apparatus. It is a front view by the side of the turntable in the back back movable production | presentation unit shown in the state made into the position. It is a front view of the back and back movable effect unit showing a schematic configuration of the sub effect display device in a turnable position at the first turning position. It is a front view of a back back movable production | generation unit which shows the movable range of the sub production | presentation display apparatus in a 1st turning position by schematic structure. It is a front view of a back rear movable production | generation unit which shows the movable range of the sub production | presentation display apparatus in a 2nd turning position by schematic structure. It is a front view of a back rear movable production | generation unit which shows the movable range of the sub production | presentation display apparatus in a 3rd turning position by schematic structure. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back lower movable production unit in the back back movable production unit of the back unit, and (b) back the back back lower movable production unit in the back back movable production unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back top first rotation decoration body and back top second rotation decoration body of the back top movable production unit in the back unit are moved to the lowered position. The back and rear movable movable body unit and the rear and right movable decorative body unit of the back and rear movable movable unit and the back and right movable movable body unit are separated from each other in the state of the first turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the position to the approach position. The back and rear movable movable body unit and the rear and right movable decorative body unit of the rear and rear movable movable unit and the rear and rear movable movable body unit are separated from each other in the state of the third turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the position to the approach position. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the sub production display device in the back rear movable production unit of the back unit is moved to the projecting position in the normal first turning position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit is turned from the first turning position to the second turning position in the protruding position state. FIG. 207 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the sub effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 207 to the retracted position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit is moved from the second turning position to the third turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 209 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the sub-effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 209 to the retracted position. From the state of FIG. 205, the back back left rotating decoration body and the back back right rotating decoration body in the back back left movable decoration body unit and back back right movable decoration body unit of the back back left movable decoration unit and In addition to setting the state of the three production positions, the back first rotation decoration body and the back second rotation decoration body of the back movable production unit are moved to the lowered position, and the back first rotation decoration body and the second back rotation It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the decoration is rotated. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 as viewed from the front, and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 540. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left part of the door frame 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side part The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550. It includes a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feeding unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is the upper and lower sides from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and passes through the entrance 251a and the ball exit 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 removed is inserted into a security recess (not shown) of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the game 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the region 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as seen from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the ball launching device 680, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feeding port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253a that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and divides between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball removing member 253 and the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 and extend vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feed member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around an axis, and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. The part opened to the rear on the end side is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hitting ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved back and forth by a ball feeding operation rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and a movement of the tip of the ball feeding operation rod 256 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b, A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feeding unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 256 that is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operation rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 to thereby move the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state located. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  Further, the ball removing member 253 pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the actuating rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the ball removal member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball is taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 by operating a string, the illegal game ball launched (hit) by the ball launcher 680 is illegal. After a string attached to a simple game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear after the lid member is removed. is there. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operation protrusion portion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 attached rotatably to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 that is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and a front view of the upper dish ball removal button 327. A ball rental button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball rental button 328, and a ball rental button 328 The ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 約 bulges forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store a game ball, and is attached to the tray tray cover 326 and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a up and down to allow the game ball to be discharged. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendered production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end side of the front end side that extends short to the left and right, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in the front view. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half wraps around the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340). Area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area in which the game ball can be stored (the area corresponding to the storage area in plan view and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the dotted hatch area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326 j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It arrange | positions at the lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back of the side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In a state in which is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately inserted into the region on the left side of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps up, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 It is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Accordingly, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can do. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separated, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Moreover, although the cover standing wall part 340a of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example which stood up from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325, the bottom wall part 325a of the lower dish main body 325 showed the bottom plate cover 340's The cover standing wall 340a may rise. Moreover, although the ceiling part 340b of the lower tray cover 340 showed the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown in the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape with no through holes. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance that passes through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, a production image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the production operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2 and the production operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped upward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. Moreover, the return part 322e is good also as what does not comprise the side wall of the lower plate 322, and may comprise a part of side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rear side of the covering wall on the front end side of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit mounting part 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In addition, the area | region shown with a dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 has shown the remaining space of the attachment space 326j.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, as compared with the main body unit 325A. Projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension part 325B is formed with an escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIGS. 47B and 47C, the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than that of the example of FIG. The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower platen main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. In addition, since the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be split, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes behind (in the installation space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball punching hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. You may make it provide the lower dish ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. However, the game ball is placed on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper tray ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guide path 323f An opening through which the operation transmitting portion 327a that is penetrating back and forth at a height between the two and contacting the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 faces rearward. Includes a 323g, the. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. Yes.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. In addition, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. Further, the upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the front lower dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole penetrating in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the site of the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). In addition, the dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover part 326k comes into contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 comes into contact with the right end. Yes.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side of the upper side of the top plate part 326h is shifted to the left and right by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball removal lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball removal button 327 comes into contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b that is slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. An upper pan ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are for the player in the main effect display device 1600 arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, or the like. When an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time.

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is accommodated in a stepped portion that is recessed from below to above at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward while the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge coming into contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438 is As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation buttons 410 are attached so as to be able to advance and retreat.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Each of the three press detection sensors 440 that are attached to the 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, the upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion. It has. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating through the front plate portion 432b is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the production operation unit 400. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460, and connection to the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431 a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control board in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed and display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, In addition, the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear opened. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front end of these operation button springs comes into contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, whereby the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed backward in a U shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Yes. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed to the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. A curved screen-like general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape with a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape with the axis of the upper shaft member 473 as the center in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b in the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  In addition, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member that diffuses light between the sub-screen decoration 477 and the LED 477a. The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image on which the effect image is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape and noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in the back center. The operation button 410 is pressed to the player by the lighting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to promote.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Thereby, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position and the second position where the sub screen 472 is in the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, so that the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second rendering operation unit 400 </ b> A has an overall height substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The second presentation operation unit 400 </ b> A has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second performance operation unit 400 </ b> A is attached to the dish unit 320 between the lower end of the leg piece part 512 b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate part 326 i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In addition, a gap is formed. That is, the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible as the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second performance operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second performance operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is applied to the player who presses the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), compared with a flat plate shape. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 This member can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like that are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the state of the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) made of a triangle arranged on the front side and the decoration made of a quadrangle arranged on the rear side (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) overlap each other so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. As the position moves, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the three-dimensional decoration with a depth can be displayed to the player. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected onto the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. In this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-brightness effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable can be displayed.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction to change from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. If the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect that the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is obtained. The player can be shown and entertained.

  In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the player can show a decoration with movement and a three-dimensional feeling to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Third Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the third rendering operation unit 400B, which is the third embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. FIG. 78A is a front view of a third effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. FIG.

  The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by the player in the same manner as the effect operation unit 400. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The third effect operation unit 400B has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and an effect of the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The third base unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The third base unit 520 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the That.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 are provided.

  The operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B have the same configuration as the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400, and are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a notch cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. A frame-like frame body 416 that has a portion 416c and is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and is attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame main body 416 so as to close the notch 416c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The third stage operation unit 400B can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include the first LED 422 a and the first LED 423 a that can illuminate only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. A second LED 422b and a second LED 423b that can decorate only the lens 417 are provided.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third performance operation unit as seen from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. .

  The third base unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and includes four housing walls 521a that are hemispherically recessed rearward at the center, and four blind holes that are opened forward outside the housing wall 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 attached to the upper front of the unit base 521, and four pieces inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. An operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, three press detection sensors 525 that are attached to the sensor holders 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a unit In the third stage operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  Further, the third base unit 520 is a presentation operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and a spur gear-like attached to the rotation shaft of the presentation operation unit first drive motor 528. A first drive gear (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 meshed with the first drive gear and rotatably attached to the unit base 521 are provided. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating body gear 531a of a decorative rotating body unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. In addition to the housing wall 521a and the holding hole 521b, the unit base 521 houses a light-shielding wall 521c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the part to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached at the upper part of the front surface. A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating through the wall 521a, a left protrusion 521e protruding forward from the left outer side of the storage wall 521a and the substantially vertical center, and the left protrusion 521e are accommodated so as to face each other. A right protruding portion 521f that protrudes forward from a substantially right center of the wall portion 521a and the vertical direction, a left shaft portion 521g that extends in a cylindrical shape from the left protruding portion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g A right bearing portion 521h that is coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrates the right protruding portion 521f.

  The accommodation wall portion 521a recessed in a hemispherical shape to the rear of the unit base 521 is formed so that it can be accommodated in a state where the substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is not in contact with the recessed front surface side.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 at the four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the housing wall 521a. These holding holes 521b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b is a clockwise rotation with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light shielding wall 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. Is to do.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Is. The right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 is rotatably inserted with the cylindrical rotating body side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotating body unit 530. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with respect to the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. With the left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be rotatably mounted around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LED is a full color LED.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 521b in the unit base 521 from the front. The operation button spring 523 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the third effect operation unit 400B. It abuts on the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operation button spring 523 biases the operation button 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, three press detection sensors 525 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 521, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, one on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 521b via the sensor holders 524, respectively. The three press detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three press detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the left outer side (right side of the front view) of the housing wall 521a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 521. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration board 522, a press detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. The decorative operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door main body relay substrate (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100, To relay the connection.

  The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 527a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third rendering operation unit 400B is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on the attachment portion 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 and the first transmission gear 529 are connected via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520 and can show a movable effect to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the drawing, the decorative rotating body unit 530 has an overall outer surface shape that is substantially spherical.

  The decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and the rotating body base unit 531 formed in a disk shape and one of the disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531. A first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of the surface, and a first decorative surface portion rotatably attached to the outer surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532. A second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration from 532, and an effect operation unit second drive motor 534 (which is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 and rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 ( 83).

  82 and 83, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and includes a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 of the rotating body base unit 531 are mounted on the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, and light can be emitted toward the second decorative surface portion 533. And a second decorative surface portion decorative board 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The rotating body base unit 531 has a disk shape with a predetermined thickness, and the inside is formed to be hollow. The rotating body base unit 531 is attached at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface, and passes through the center of the rotating body gear 531a and a spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b so as to be relatively rotatable, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body gear 531a so as to be relatively rotatable in the right bearing portion 521h. A rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted and a stopper 531d projecting outward on the proximal end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotator gear 531a, the rotator-side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotator-side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disc-shaped center of the rotator base unit 531 and pass through the center in the axial direction of the outer peripheral surface. It arrange | positions coaxially with respect to uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to contact the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d restricts the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotating body unit 530 relative to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angular range (here, 180 degrees).

  The rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing tube portion 531e extending in a cylindrical shape concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the center of the disk, and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f decorating the outer peripheral surface. It is equipped with. The shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the bearing tube portion 531e, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by bushes attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decorative portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and can release the heat in the rotating body base unit 531 to the outside and decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. Can improve the appearance.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the surrounding surface in which several LED which is attached in the rotating body base unit 531 and can irradiate light toward the surrounding surface decoration part 531f is mounted in the decoration rotating body unit 530. You may make it provide a decoration part decoration board | substrate. By appropriately emitting light from the LED on the peripheral surface decorative portion decoration board, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be light-decorated.

  The entire first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decorative portion 532a made up of predetermined characters provided at the center of the bulged surface, and a translucent first formed radially around the logo decorative portion 532a. One main decorative portion 532b and a light-impermeable first sub-decoration formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the outer peripheral end forming a circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532 A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d protruding in a columnar shape from the back surface along the center are provided.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are decorated with light emission by light from the LEDs mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing tube portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed in such a length that it passes through the bearing tube portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extends to the opposite side in a state assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is the first axis. It will be in the state which corresponded with the 2nd axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 can be rotated around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing tube portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, and between the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531, and the rotary body base unit. And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to 531. Since the rotation decoration part 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, the rotation decoration part 533a can rotate together with the first decoration surface part 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotating decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotation decoration portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decorative portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b are partially translucent, and are decorated with light emission by the light from the LEDs mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward. A spur gear-like second drive gear 534 a is attached to the rotation shaft of the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-like decorative surface portion gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotated decorative portion 533a) are provided by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 via the second drive gear 534a, decorative surface portion gear 534b, and shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 have a white front surface, and the mounted LEDs are full color LEDs.

  In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in the circumferential direction around the second axis CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Effect of the third stage operation unit]
Next, the function and effect of the third performance operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88, and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit shown with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing seen from the direction which exists. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion with the first decorative surface portion facing forward in the third effect operation unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which faced the front.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed by the game ball being shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the player participation type effect presented to the player by operating the operation button 410.

  Although not shown, the third performance operation unit 400B has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower part of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the third effect operation unit 400 </ b> B is formed so that the full width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the third rendering operation unit 400B is attached to the tray unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. A gap is formed. That is, the third rendering operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the central axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Accordingly, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible in the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 523. Has been. In the normal state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated in the same manner as the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A by the urging force of the operation button spring 523. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of 410 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B has a center side (center axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 523. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment is performed. Like the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A, the button 410 is attached so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line. When 410 is pressed, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. 61, a part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a part (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire third performance operation unit 400B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the third performance operation unit 400B. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who presses the operation button 410. Can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the third performance operation unit 400B is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or struck down, the bottom surface of the leg portion 527a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third rendering operation unit 400B is restricted, and the rendering operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the tray unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to avoid an unreasonable force from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the third performance operation unit 400B and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, Since the three-stage operation unit 400B and the like will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to prevent damage to the game hall side. Increase in burden can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), so that it has a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes a first button decoration portion 411a that extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a. The concave and convex decoration makes it difficult to see the back at the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530 The first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530 from the front side (player side). . As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the decorative rotating body unit 530 that rotates, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. And the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be disposed without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, and the operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530, and thus the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be better.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530 disposed in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated in the operation button 410 by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon to emit light. Then, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are decorated with light emission, so that the inside of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light emission. At this time, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 includes a cylindrical main body 413a that surrounds the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B has the operation button left outer decorative board in the decorative board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are disposed, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can be made. The first LED 422a of the operation button outer left decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. (See FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is inside the main body 413a (decorative rotating body unit 530 side) and the inner cylinder. There is no leakage to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decoration board 522 in the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 522. By emitting light from the plurality of LEDs, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. From the lower side of the unit base 521 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 is attached in the third base unit 520, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c projects forward to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  The third rendering operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotating body unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 faces forward as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80 and the like. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 is substantially coincident with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). Further, in a normal state, the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is rotated and stopped in a state where the rotation position of the first decoration surface portion 532 around the second axis CL2 is directed in the correct direction.

  Further, in a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in a normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the direction in which the upper part moves rearward is restricted by the stopper 531d with respect to the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally.

  In this normal state, the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520 causes the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 to pass through the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. Is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view, the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates around the first axis CL1 so that the upper part thereof moves forward. When the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d comes into contact with the front surface below the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotates. Is restricted, and the rotational drive by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the 3rd base unit 520 is provided with the rotation detection sensor which detects the rotation position of the decoration rotary body unit 530, and based on the detection by a rotation detection sensor, the decoration rotary body unit 530 is equipped. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 in the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 is substantially coincident with the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B is extended coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decoration rotating body unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decoration surface gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated simultaneously (see FIG. 89). In other words, the production operation unit second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can do.

  Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at an arbitrary rotational position. Therefore, even if it has the logo decoration part 532a which has directionality like the 1st decoration surface part 532, since rotation can be stopped in the position according to the directionality, the decoration of the 1st decoration surface part 532 is spoiled. The decorativeness can be surely exhibited.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B uses the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530 to change the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, Each can be illuminated. The light emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. Or when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 includes a rotating decorative portion 533a that rotates and a fixed decorative portion 533b that does not rotate. When a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light, a part of the light irradiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is periodically changed depending on the opaque portion or the colored portion of the rotating decorative portion 533a. As a result, it is possible to show the player a flickering flashing decoration, which can attract the player's attention strongly.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect that rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 etc., the movable effect of the decoration rotary body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward.

  As an example of a movable effect that rotates only around the first axis CL1 that extends horizontally, from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90 (a)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the first drive gear (not shown). Omission) The first decorative gear unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotary gear 531a without stopping midway. The second decorative surface portion 533 disposed on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 is set to face forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). Thereby, it is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit is configured so that the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view within an angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees from the normal state. The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f interposed between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the first decorative surface portion 532. (See FIG. 90B), the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible and hidden as the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocally rotates. The player's sense of expectation for the arrival of a chance can be increased depending on whether or not the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is returned to the base state (the state shown in FIG. 90 (a)), thereby making it possible to suggest that the player does not have a chance. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it can be suggested that a chance has arrived. Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). Thus, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward on the upper side. The decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear, so that a plurality of peripheral surfaces provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are relatively disposed. The decoration of the surface decoration 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral decoration 531f can be enjoyed. In addition, the decoration rotating body unit 530 stops the rotation of the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f at an intermediate position facing forward, so that the player can feel a change in the game situation, and the player's game The expectation for can be raised. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated from the normal state by 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side (see FIG. 90C), and the rotation angle is set at a predetermined angle around the rotation angle. The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the range. Accordingly, the rotary body base unit 531 (a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f) is sandwiched so that the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more. Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be exciting and exciting, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). With the state as a reference, it is possible to perform a movable effect that performs the opposite operation to the above, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward is rotated so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels ascending momentum. It is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to turn the second decorative surface portion 533 upward so that the player's line of sight is directed to the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to entertain games and effects in the game area 5a and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When executing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 are output. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately illuminated. This makes it easier to see the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between the decorations. A premium feeling due to a difference in decoration can be sufficiently exhibited, and the decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410 by making the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 light emitting, execution of a player participation type effect in which the operation button 410 is pressed is performed. Sometimes, the player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained and entertained in the player participation type effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is the rendering operation unit second drive motor. 534 is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, the clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the center axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the decorative rotating body unit 530 to rotate 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side without stopping in the middle. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is set in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that has been rotated clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (the rotational decorative portion 533a) is replaced with the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating in the counterclockwise direction of the opposite direction, so it can give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's attention strongly, and something to the player It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 is maintained in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees in the right side view. Thus, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 above the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of non-peripheral decorative portions 531f are visible, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is slightly visible above the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decorative rotator unit 530 can reciprocately rotate around the first axis CL1, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly to the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible and hidden. Whether or not 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation for the arrival of a chance. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. If the surface portion 533 is in the forward direction (the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)), and the player wants it, it can be convinced that a chance has arrived, and the player will be entertained and entertaining will be suppressed. Can be made. Note that after the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is in the correct orientation. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance and increasing the player's expectation for the game. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 from the state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view with respect to the periphery of the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). . Thus, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward on the upper side. In this state, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are unclear because they are positioned and moved so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating base unit 531 sandwiched between them can be clearly seen. Therefore, the stationary peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be made conspicuous in the operation button 410, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is moved forward. In the state (refer to FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is moved a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around the state. To rotate forward and backward. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side and the second decorative surface portion 533 side that are rotating around the second axis CL2 can be seen more or less, with the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) interposed therebetween. Therefore, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front. Can be made. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. By making the surface portion 533 forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (b)), the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. The second decorative surface unit 533 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL from the state where the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated forward by 180 degrees or from the normal state. After the surface portion 533 is directed forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and this state (see FIG. 91 (d)) is used as a reference. Can also perform a movable effect that performs the reverse operation, and can achieve the same effects as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 with respect to the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction will appear from below, it is possible to make the player feel lifted, to increase the expectation for the game, and to increase the second axis. Due to the upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2, the player's line of sight can be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a It is possible to entertain games and performances at the same time and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversed in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined angle range. Further, the rotation speed around the first axis CL1 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the second speed of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotation speed around the axis CL2 may be the same rotation speed or a different rotation speed. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of movable effects by the third effect operation unit 400B, and to suppress a decrease in interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored by the rich variations of the movable effects. it can.

  Further, when executing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light appropriately and rotate around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are in a state appropriately decorated with light emission. Thereby, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light emission with uniform light. On the other hand, in the state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 is flickered by periodically blocking light by the rotary decorative portion 533a. It can be decorated with light. Thus, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be variously decorated with light emission, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect that causes the operation button 410 to be pressed. When the game is executed, the player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player participation type effect and entertain.

[3-4h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third stage operation unit]
Next, the exhaust heat action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the air flow caused by the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third performance operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410 includes the operation button 410 and the unit base 521 (accommodating wall portion 521a) of the third base unit 520. Is arranged in the button inner space AS whose front and rear are closed (see FIG. 92). The housing wall 521a that forms the rear part of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed with a plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the button internal space AS communicates with the inside of the attachment space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, attachment space 326j is connected with the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 through the exhaust port formed in the baseplate part 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, one shaft member 532d attached to the bearing tube portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 so as to be rotatable coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 that rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is attached in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f made of penetrating hole-shaped decorations are formed, and through these peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f, Are in communication with each other.

  Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that are rotatably mounted around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape that can generate wind when rotated.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B having the above-described configuration, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are disposed in the effect operation unit No. 1 with the first decoration surface portion 532 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the second drive motor 534 is rotated in the predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 causes a plurality of the accommodating wall portions 521a covering the rear. Through the ventilation port 521d, it will come out to the rear side of the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92A). With the flow of this wind, the air in the button inner space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated can be forcibly exhausted to the outside for ventilation. Since the button inner space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat released from the presentation operation unit second drive motor 534 is transferred to the plurality of peripheral surfaces. It can be discharged to the back of the third effect operation unit 400B (in the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation port 521d. Thereby, it can suppress that the temperature in the decoration rotary body unit 530 or the operation button 410 rises abnormally, and generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by heat can be prevented.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment is configured so that the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are changed to the effect operation unit No. 1 with the second decoration surface portion 533 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the two-drive motor 534 is rotated in the predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided rearward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, it passes through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the housing wall 521a covering the back of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and comes out rearward from the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92B). This wind flow allows the air in the button inner space AS, in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated, to be forcibly discharged to the outside for ventilation, and is thus installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 passes through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation port 521d, and is located behind the third rendering operation unit 400B (the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320). Inside). Thereby, it can suppress that the temperature in the decoration rotary body unit 530 or the operation button 410 rises abnormally, and generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by heat can be prevented.

  The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the housing wall 521a in the unit base 521 passes through the exhaust ports (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340. Is discharged outside.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. The door frame left side unit 540 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 540 is a band plate-like left unit base 541 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 542 attached to the front surface and a translucent element disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 544 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. A left unit lower decorative base 545 that is shorter than the decorative base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape, and covers the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541 and a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546 are provided.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of openings 541a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 541 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) through a plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusing lens member 542A and a lower diffusing lens member 542B. The left unit diffusing lens member 542 includes a circular lens portion 542a in front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541, and a square in front view corresponding to the square opening 541a. A lens portion 542b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with a smooth front surface and rear surface. By this circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 542c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuse lens portion 542d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 542c on the front surface. An input lens portion 542e that bulges back in the shape of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and forwards as it is far from the input lens portion 542e outside the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 542f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the central diffusive reflecting portion 542c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 542d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a groove portion is recessed in an arc shape to the rear, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 542d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, which is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed backward, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with a radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines dividing in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 542b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 542b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 542e into the rectangular lens unit 542b. Since this input lens portion 542e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 542c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflector 542c is perpendicular to the front and rear axes (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 542c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 542b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 542c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 542c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 542b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 542f, the front side of the front reflection part 542f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 542c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 542b is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 542f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542b through the front diffusion lens portion 542d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens diffuser 542d and the front reflector 542f, the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light radiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 542b has the density of the concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative part forward from the square lens part 542b of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 by the light irradiated from the circular lens part 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 to the front of the circular decorative part. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 544 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 544 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed in a U shape whose front view is open upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially vertical center of the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the upper decorative base 544 on the left unit, The upper part of the lower decorative base 545 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper square part is connected to the upper end of the lower square part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 546 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 97 to FIG. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 97 (a). 101A is a cross-sectional view taken along line P-P in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 101B is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in FIG. 97A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape with a square tube shape that is short in the front-rear direction and closed in the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a is moved to the right as viewed from the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more greatly than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 556a moves to the left from the front end as it moves forward from the rear end side, and the whole body portion 556a is entirely perpendicular to the front vertical line of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape in side view as in the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 101, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are replaced with the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes in a plate shape larger forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By making the member 561 and the like illuminate in a unique manner, the attendant of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and recognized, and the problem can be quickly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 102A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 102B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 102C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 574 has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and is disposed on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574 The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side of each of the top right decorative lens member 580. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 574 are penetrated. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward in a front view. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right sides, and about a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion projecting forward. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending leftward and rightward at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely from the portion protruding in a trapezoidal shape forward in the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut from the rear end in the left-right direction on the lower surface to the front. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front side of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 105). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is connected to the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 105). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that the opened portion is closed by the unit main body 574. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side to the left of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. Thereby, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 are formed on the right side. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The height in the vertical direction of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion port 605 that passes through the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and a door of the board unit 900 that passes through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and the lower side. A connecting opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board placement part 602 when viewed from the front, and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. A speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is provided. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attaching portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivotable to a position slightly lower on the left side from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 whose rear part is bent in an L shape upward, and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend from the left end to the upper side and extend upward from the left end. A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108 and 109. FIG. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a columnar shape from the bottom of the unit base 701 to the front, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 128. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main configuration. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 119 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. FIG. 120A is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 120B is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit exploded and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full ball path unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . Moreover, FIG. 127 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  The payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c. The Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the player's interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust or dirt does not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. A payout vane 839 is disposed at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and that has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  The three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 with the dispensing device 830 assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout vane 839 comes into contact with the outer peripheries of the front vane 839b and the rear vane 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the bent portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d in a crank shape. Cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the dispensing vane 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, and from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper portion of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 120) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 120A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120B). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion into left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front, and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full guideway 862, and a lower bulb guideway 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 128).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, thereby operating the door frame 3. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls through the foul cover unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storage of the game ball in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in the gaming state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to make the player devoted to the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board, and the peripheral control board, and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 135. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in which the panel of the game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as seen from the back. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is a front view of the front unit of the game board cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in which the panel of the game panel is in a transparent state.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. And a plate-like game panel 1100 to be partitioned. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game content which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and is driven by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 212) for controlling the control.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, a main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are the gaming region 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open so as to be able to receive game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, A second starting port 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing through the gate part 2003, and a game ball received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the prize winning hole 2005 that can accept game balls and the game balls accepted in the big prize winning hole 2005 are distributed. A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 that is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the start that becomes the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. One general winning port 2001, gate portion 2003, second start port 2004, large winning port 2005, receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port are attached to the right of the front unit 2100 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 having 2008, a game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Includes the frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back box 3010 and a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010; It has.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back movable movable effect unit 3200 attached to the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 above the opening. The rear rear movable production unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the rear box 3010 on the rear side of the rear upper movable production unit 3200.

  The back rear movable production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is installed in the back box 3010 and the back rear central movable production unit 3350 and the back and rear sides attached to the left and right sides of the turning table 3380 of the back rear central movable production unit 3350. Left movable effect unit 3400, rear right movable effect unit 3500, back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the turntable 3380, and back rear lower moveable effect attached to the lower part of the turntable 3380 And a unit 3700.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball guided backward by the out guiding part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002, although not shown. These positioning protrusions can be inserted into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned with respect to the panel holder (the gaming panel 1100) by being inserted into mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1123 of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 passes through the notch 1011 and the lower full ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion. And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1123 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1123 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 passes through the notch 1011 and the normal guidance of the lower full ball path unit 860 is conducted. The front end openings of the path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 132 and 133. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) that controls game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second start port sensor 2402, the big prize port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor via the panel relay board 3031. 2405, a start opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a V winning opening solenoid 2416, a general winning opening sensor 3101, a first starting opening sensor 3102, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 129, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 made up of two LEDs, a normal hold indicator 1403 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of held balls relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate 2003, and the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 The first special symbol display 1404 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result selected by the first special lottery, and the second LED composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002. One special hold number display 1405 and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second starting port 2004 are displayed. 2nd special symbol display 1406 made up of LEDs, a second special hold number display 1407 made up of two LEDs that show the number of holds for receiving game balls in the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery When the result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, or when the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is received in the first receiving opening 2007, the number of times the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 is repeated ( And a round indicator 1408 composed of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 133. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 212) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a first effect drive board 3032, a second effect drive board 3033, Etc. are connected.

[5-7. Main effect display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 132 and 133. The main effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the approximate center of the rear wall of the back box. The main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. Then, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 132 and 133. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (four here) general winning holes 2001 and a plurality of general winning holes 2001. And a first start port 2002 that is always open so that a game ball can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball. And a second start port 2004 that allows game balls to be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 that can accept a game ball in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1008, and has a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, A side unit 2200 having two general winning ports 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left in front view of the start port unit 2100, and attached on the right in front view of the start port unit 2100. An attacker unit 2400 having a single general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a large winning port 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008, and a game And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the approximate center in the region 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the front opening unit and the side unit in the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the back. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. This start port unit 2100 is formed at a position directly above the out port 1008 at the top, and is always open upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. One general prize which is formed to the left in front view below the opening 2002 and the first starting opening 2002, and is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. And a mouth 2001.

  The start port unit 2100 is formed so that a portion excluding the front face of the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 is transparent, and the rear side (the front front decoration of the back unit 3000 is passed through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). Unit 3100) can be viewed.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are opened upward, so that the first start The mouth 2002 is located immediately below the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 described later. Therefore, when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game balls received in the general winning port 2001 or the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are respectively detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 and the first starting opening sensor 3102 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212). ).

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning holes 2001 arranged near the right end in front view, and a right shelf 2201 which is arranged above the two general winning holes 2001 and is inclined downward toward the right. And a left shelf 2202 that is disposed above the right shelf 2201 and in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and is inclined so as to become lower to the right.

  One of the two general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 is open obliquely upward and to the right on the lower right side of the right shelf 2201, and the other is left obliquely on the lower left side of the right shelf 2201. Opening upward. The two general winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are arranged side by side so as to face each other. The side unit 2200 is formed with a transparent portion excluding the two general winning award ports 2001 (right shelf 2201) and the front surface of the left shelf 2202 and back (through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100). The back decorative unit 3100) of the unit 3000 can be visually recognized.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning holes 2001, the right shelf portion 2201, and the left shelf portion 2202 are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rightmost side The general winning opening 2001 is slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 of the start opening unit 2100. In the side unit 2200 attached to the panel plate 1110, the right shelf 2201 is lower than the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the left shelf 2202 is higher than the first start port 2002. Is in position. The left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200 is close to the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 at the left end, and can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right.

  The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3101 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 212).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of an attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of FIG. FIG. 139 is an explanatory view showing the flow path of the game ball in the attacker unit in cross section. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 of four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2007. A receiving port 2008 is provided.

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a gate portion 2003 through which game balls circulate (pass) up and down in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward directly under the gate portion 2003. ing. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open obliquely to the lower right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a reception space 2006 having a predetermined size in which the game balls received in the special prize opening 2005 circulate is disposed below the special prize opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward in the receiving space 2006, and is always open upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. Two receiving ports 2008 are arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 opens with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and the gate portion 2003 penetrates vertically with a size slightly larger than the game ball. In the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and the big prize port 2005 is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 is received in the gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that passes through the gate unit 2003, the second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball received in the second start port 2004, and the grand prize port 2005. A winning prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball, a first reception sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball received in the first reception port 2007, and a first detection of the game ball received in the second reception port 2008. Two receiving port sensors 2405.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening door 2411 that can open and close the second start opening 2004, and a start that opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 according to a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2003. The first solenoid 2412, the first prize opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the first prize opening 2005, and the first prize opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving a game ball in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. The attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the game balls that are received in the big winning opening 2005 and circulate in the receiving space 2006 are transferred to the first receiving port 2007) Or the V winning opening door 2415 and the V winning opening door 2415 as the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening. And a, and V winning hole solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result is the lottery or the second special lottery result by accepting game balls to 004.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 at the upper end and the lower end, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which game balls can flow, A left side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and allows game balls to circulate, a right side passage 2423 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate portion 2003 and allows game balls to circulate, and a gate passage 2421, An attacker capable of circulating game balls that extends to the left below the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 and above the winning prize opening 2005 from the lower side of the right side passage 2423 to the lower left side. And a passage 2424.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 extends vertically on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2004, and forms a part of the gate passage 2421. The second starting port left wall portion 2425 and the second starting port right wall portion 2426 are provided. A left side passage bottom wall portion 2427 that extends from the upper end of the second start port left wall portion 2425 toward the upper left and forms the bottom wall of the left side passage 2422, and a height lower than the gate portion 2003. From the lower end of the right side passage right wall portion 2428 and the right side passage right wall portion 2428 that extends up and down to a height below the second start port 2004 and forms the right wall of the right side passage 2423. An attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 that extends to the left halfway in the left-right direction of the grand prize winning port 2005 so that the left end side is lowered, and forms the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2424, and the grand prize winning port 200. Left side from the left end of the is provided with a release ledge 2430 which extends to the left so as to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in the gate passage 2421, a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that a game ball can pass therethrough. . The second starting port 2004 is configured such that the game balls are not directly received from the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 by the left wall 2425 and the second starting port right wall 2426 on the left and right sides. Yes. The downstream end of the left side passage 2422 is joined to the gate passage 2421 on the upper side of the second start port 2004 by the left side passage bottom wall portion 2427. The attacker passage 2424 extends to the left of the left side passage 2422. The right winning opening 2005 that is open to the left and right is located at the right end substantially below the second start opening 2004, and a part of the upper side (opening) is covered by the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429. Yes.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 opened forward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second start port door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second start port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball that has flowed down in the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 can be guided to the second start opening 2004 and received in the second start opening 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let

  The grand prize opening door 2413 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game ball that has circulated on the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the attacker passage 2424 to the left, and then the discharge shelf portion 2430. Can be handed over. The special prize opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special prize opening 2005, and after passing through any one of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker The game ball released from the left end of the attacker passage bottom wall portion 2429 of the passage 2424 can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  The V prize opening door 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front-rear direction in the receiving space 2006 and extending right and left so that the right end is lowered. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) is openable and closable. The V winning opening door 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving opening 2007, guides the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 to the right, and is always open upward. It can be accepted in 2008. Also, the V winning opening door 2415 is driven backward by the V winning opening solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball received in the big winning port 2005 is highly probable as the first receiving port. 2007 can be accepted. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the V winning port solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and the first receiving port when the V winning port solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). 2007 is opened. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game balls received in the big winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the gate passage 2421 is positioned below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later. The part 2003 and the second start port 2004 are located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the special winning opening 2005 is located above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 is located below the first starting opening 2002.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is not moved even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530. Never pass. Therefore, only the game balls that have flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2540) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2540, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left. Will enter. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2421 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed is opened upward below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, The game ball that has flowed down on the right side enters the gate passage 2421 with a high probability and passes through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 immediately below. At this time, if the second starter door 2411 rotates forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starter door 2411 and is second. It is guided to the start port 2004 side and is received by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401). Since it is driven at the same time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starter door 2411, etc., the game ball itself having the “normal hit” lottery is accepted into the second starter 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  In this gate passage 2421, it communicates with the lower end of the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004, so that it enters the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. The game balls thus made can be circulated to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate part 2003. Accordingly, in a state where the second start port 2411 is moved to the open position and the second start port 2004 can be received, a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or a game ball that has circulated through the left side passage 2422. Can be received at the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. The gate passage 2421 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003 because the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicates with the middle of the right side passage 2423. There is a possibility that the game ball that has entered may be received in the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, a game ball that passes through the gate part 2003 or circulates through the left side passage 2422 may enter the right side passage 2423 through a portion of the gate passage 2421 that communicates with the right side passage 2423. It does not necessarily pass in front of the second start port 2004 (second start port 2411).

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start port 2004, the game ball is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the right side passage 2423 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball released to the attacking passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacking passage bottom wall portion 2429 and closes the big winning opening 2005 from the left end of the attacking passage bottom wall portion 2429. It is discharged downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2430 through 2413. At this time, if the grand prize opening door 2413 that closes the grand prize opening 2005 is retreated and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2424 have a high probability. Accepted in 2005. The game ball received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then sent to the reception space 2006, and either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008 by the V prize opening door 2415. It is distributed to.

  The game ball received in the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2404 or the second receiving port sensor 2405, and is moved downward (substrate holder) 1200)).

  There is a possibility that the game ball released downward from the release shelf 2430 is received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then delivered to the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the gaming area 5a and are discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-8d. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the center combination in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the back. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has been. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the various effect units and the like provided in the main effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. Can do.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. An open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of releasing the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a are provided.

  The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2530 is inclined so that a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. The game balls can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2530 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in the front view to the left and then releases it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located slightly on the left side of the attacker unit 2400 immediately above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Yes.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a logo decoration unit 2550 that is disposed at an upper portion in the frame and is provided with a predetermined logo (not shown) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The logo decoration unit 2550 has a translucent logo decoration body 2551 in which a predetermined logo is formed in a relief shape, and is attached to the rear side of the logo decoration body 2551 and can irradiate light forward. And a logo decoration board 2552 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The logo decorating unit 2550 can appropriately decorate the logo decorating body 2551 with the LEDs of the logo decorating substrate 2552. The logo decoration unit 2550 is formed to be positioned above the main effect display device 1600 in a front view in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. Accordingly, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls that circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, a game ball can be received with respect to the big winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 141 and 142. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each main configuration. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end in rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 A first effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back box 3010 and a second effect drive board 3033 attached to the right side of the first effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010; It has.

  Also, the back unit 3000 covers the first production drive board cover 3034 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the first production drive board 3032 and the rear side of the second production drive board 3033. And a second effect drive board cover 3035 attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a frame-like back front decoration unit 3100 attached along the outer peripheral edge at the front end of the back box 3010, and an opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The rear movable movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the rear movable movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010 and the rear rear movable dynamic effect unit 3300 attached to the front side of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are provided on the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300. .

  The rear unit 3000 includes a rear rear upper movable production unit 3600 attached to the upper front portion of the turning table 3380 of the rear rear central movable production unit 3350 and a rear rear lower movable production unit attached to the lower front portion of the turning table. 3700. The rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 includes a sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than that of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back box in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back box in the back unit as seen from the back. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600 is recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side when viewed from the back in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and the liquid crystal And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the attachment 3010b in the back view.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of main effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9b. Front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The front front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and is formed in a frame shape that extends over the entire circumference with respect to the periphery of the back box 3010.

  The front decoration unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3101 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in each of the start opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000. A first start port sensor 3102 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and a magnetic sensor 3103 that can detect unauthorized magnetism applied from outside in the game area 5a; It is equipped with.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a back front left decoration unit 3110 formed in an L shape so as to be along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010, and the right side and the upper side at the front end of the back box 3010. And a back front right decoration unit 3130 formed in an inverted L shape so as to extend along the line.

  The front left decorative unit 3110 is attached to the front side of the left base 3111 and an L-shaped left base 3111 having translucency attached along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010. A translucent front left decorative body 3112 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface of the cage and attached to the front side of the left base 3111 at the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3112 extending vertically. The front left decorative board 3113 on which a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface, and the left base 3111 behind the part extending left and right in the front left decorative body 3112 And a back front lower decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of LEDs that are attached to the rear side and can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface.

  The front left decorative unit 3110 allows a game ball to pass through a position extending to the left and right of the front front left decorative body 3112 at a position behind the general winning port 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the front unit 2000. An opening 3112a is provided. The game ball that has passed through the opening 3112a is released downward through the space between the front left decorative body 3112 and the left base 3111. At this time, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by a general winning hole sensor 3101 attached to the left base 3111, and the game ball received in the first start opening 2002 is input to the left base 3111. It is detected by the attached first start port sensor 3102. The magnetic sensor 3103 is attached to the left base 3111 at a position near the rear of the first start port 2002.

  The front left decorative unit 3110 can appropriately decorate the front left decorative body 3112 by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front left decorative substrate 3113 and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3114 to emit light appropriately. .

  The front right decoration unit 3130 is attached to the front side of the right base 3131 and the reverse L-shaped right base 3131 having translucency attached along the right side and the upper side at the front end of the back box 3010. The front right decorative body 3132 having translucency, with a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface, and on the front side of the right base 3131 behind the portion extending vertically in the front front right decorative body 3132 A front right decorative substrate 3133 mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and capable of emitting light forward, and a right base 3131 behind a portion of the back front right decorative body 3132 extending left and right. And a front front decorative substrate 3134 on which a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface.

  The front right decorative unit 3130 can light-decorate the front right decorative body 3132 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front right decorative board 3133 and the front upper decorative board 3134. .

  When the back front decoration unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, the back front left decoration body 3112 and the back front right decoration body 3132 are located outside the center accessory 2500 in the front view game area 5a. It can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the transparent panel plate 1110. Thereby, the front front decoration unit 3100 can decorate the rear side of the area where the game balls outside the center accessory 2500 flow down in the game area 5a.

[5-9c. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 152. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back-side movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable unit of the back movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front along with the back movable main unit, and FIG. 150 is an exploded view of the back vertical unit of the back movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back with the back upper movable main body unit. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable main unit of the back movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is a rear view of the movable movable unit as seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3200 is attached on the rear side of the front front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and above the opening 3010a. The back movable production unit 3200 includes a back lifting unit 3210 attached in the back box 3010 and a back movable main unit 3230 that is lifted and lowered by the back lifting unit 3210.

  The back lifting unit 3210 is a flat plate lifting unit base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010 and a circle protruding forward from the lower right corner of the lifting unit base 3211 for rotatably mounting the back movable unit 3230. A columnar lifting support shaft 3212, a back lifting drive motor 3213 attached to the rear surface of the lifting unit base 3211, the rotating shaft extending forward through the lifting unit base 3211, and the back lifting drive A spur gear-like elevating drive gear 3214 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3213, and a spur gear-like elevating relay gear 3215 meshing with the elevating drive gear 3214 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3211 More than the operating gear portion 3216a meshing with the lifting relay gear 3215, the operating gear portion 3216a An extending portion 3216b extending outward in the radial direction, a cylindrical drive pin 3216c protruding forward from the vicinity of the tip of the extending portion 3216b, and a flat plate-like lift formed at the tip of the extending portion 3216b A lifting link gear member 3216 having a detection piece 3216d and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3211 is provided.

  Further, the back lifting unit 3210 penetrates back and forth on one end side, a driving hole 3217a into which the driving pin 3216c of the lifting link gear member 3216 is rotatably inserted, and front and back on the other end side. A rod-like lifting link member 3217 having a working hole 3217b through which the working pin 3231b of the back movable body base 3231 in the back movable body base 3231 is rotatably inserted and attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3211. And a stopper member 3218 that restricts the rotation end of the lift link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board that are attached to the stopper member 3218. 3033, the back top rotation drive motor 3235 and the back top cover of the back top movable main unit 3230 A back relay board 3219 that relays the connection to the board 3234, and a back lift sensor 3220 that is attached to the stopper member 3218 and can detect the lift detection piece 3216d of the lift link gear member 3216. Yes.

  The elevating unit base 3211 is formed of a metal plate. The lifting unit base 3211 is provided with a lower stopper portion 3211a that extends upward and downward and forward and backward by being bent forward at a portion below and on the left side of the portion to which the lifting support shaft 3212 is attached. A plate-like impact absorbing material 3221 is attached to the surface facing the right side of the lower stopper portion 3211a. The lower stopper portion 3211 a is formed so that the back movable body base 3231 of the back movable body unit 3230 abuts via the shock absorber 3221, and is directed in the clockwise direction of the back movable body unit 3230. The rotation end (the movement end downward of the free end (right end in front view) of the backside movable main body unit 3230) is regulated.

  The elevating drive gear 3214 and the elevating relay gear 3215 are formed to have the same diameter, and the operating gear portion 3216 a of the elevating link gear member 3216 is formed to be larger in diameter than the elevating relay gear 3215. As for the raising / lowering link gear member 3216, the extension part 3216b is extended outward in fan shape from the action | operation gear part 3216a. The stopper member 3218 has a flat plate-like upper stopper portion 3218a extending forward. When the side surface of the extending portion 3216b of the elevating link gear member 3216 is in contact with the surface facing the lower side of the upper stopper portion 3218a, the rotation end of the elevating link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. . In other words, the upper stopper portion 3218a restricts the rotation of the lifting link gear member 3216 in the counterclockwise direction, so that the upper movable body unit 3230 moves upward above the free end via the lifting link gear member 3216. The moving end (rising end) is regulated.

  The rear movable body unit 3230 has a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, extends left and right, and a rear movable body base 3231 that is rotatably attached to the rear lifting unit 3210 in the vicinity of the left end of the front view. A disc-shaped back-side first rotary decoration body 3232 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction from the right end of the base 3231, and the front-side first rotary decoration body 3232 is disposed on the front side. And a back second rotary decoration body 3233 rotatably attached to the back top first rotation decoration body 3232 at a position eccentric from the axis of the back first rotation decoration body 3232. And a back decoration board 3234 attached to the rear surface of the back movable main body base 3231 to be behind the one rotation decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233.

  The rear movable body unit 3230 is attached to the front surface near the left end of the rear movable body base 3231, and the rear rotational drive motor has a rotating shaft that protrudes backward through the rear movable body base 3231. 3235, a spur gear-like rotation drive gear 3236 attached to the rotation shaft of the backside rotation drive motor 3235, a spur gear-like input gear portion 3237a meshing with the rotation drive gear 3236, and the rear side of the input gear portion 3237a The transmission relay gear 3237 having an output gear portion 3237b having a smaller diameter than the input gear portion 3237a and the output gear portion 3237b of the transmission relay gear 3237 are rotatably attached to the back movable body base 3231. A spur gear-shaped first relay gear 3238 and a back movable body base 3231 meshing with the first relay gear 3238. A spur gear-shaped second relay gear 3239 that is rotatably mounted, and a spur gear-shaped third relay gear that is meshed with the second relay gear 3239 and is rotatably mounted on the back movable body base 3231. 3240, a first rotating decorative body gear 3241 that meshes with the third relay gear 3240 and rotates integrally with the back first rotating decorative body 3232, a back movable main body base 3231, and a back first rotating decorative body 3232. A spur gear-shaped second rotating decorative body gear 3242 which is disposed between and rotated together with the back second rotating decorative body 3233 and rotates in accordance with the rotation of the back first rotating decorative body 3232. I have.

  Further, the back movable main unit 3230 is attached to the back movable main base 3231 and detects the rotation position of the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the back first rotation ornament. An axial core that is arranged on the rear side of 3232 and extends forward and backward on a circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the axial center of the back-side first rotating decorative body 3232 on the front surface of the back-side movable main body base 3231. A plurality of back-and-forth decorative bodies 3246 that are rotatably attached to the periphery, and a back-and-back decorative body 3246 that is attached to the rear side of the first back-mounted decorative body 3232 and is in contact with the back and forth decorative body 3246 A first cam member 3247 and a second cam member 3248 that rotate the decorative body 3246 to partially protrude outward from the back first rotary decorative body 3232, and a plurality of back and forth decorative bodies 3246 S a plurality of return spring 3249 which is urged to rotate in a direction that does not protrude outward from the back on the first rotating decorative body 3232, and a.

  The back movable body unit 3230 includes a base cover 3250 attached to the rear side of the back top movable body base 3231 so as to cover the rotation drive gear 3236 and the transmission relay gear 3237 from the back side, and a back top decorative substrate 3234. And a substrate cover 3251 attached to the rear side of the back movable main base 3231 so as to cover the rear side.

  The back upper movable main body base 3231 is formed in a disc shape having a right half that extends to the left and right and a larger diameter than the left side. The back movable main body base 3231 penetrates back and forth substantially at the center in the vertical direction at the left end, and is provided with a lift shaft hole 3231a rotatably attached to the lift support shaft 3212 of the back lift unit 3210, and the left end. Near the lower end of the part, it protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape, and protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape at the approximate center of the action pin 3231b that is rotatably inserted into the action hole 3217b of the lifting link member 3217 and the disk-like part of the right half Boss portion 3231c, and the first rotation support hole 3231d that penetrates back and forth at the center of the boss portion 3231c and rotatably attaches the first rotary decoration body 3232 on the back side, and the same as the first rotation support hole 3231d. A spur gear-like fixed gear portion 32 that is formed on the outer periphery of the boss portion 3231c near the front end on the core and meshes with the second rotary ornament body gear 3242. Includes a 1e, the.

  The back movable body base 3231 penetrates back and forth in the disc-shaped portion of the right half, and a plurality of openings 3231f where the first LED 3234a of the back decorative substrate 3234 faces forward, and the outer periphery of the disc-shaped portion. On the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity, a plurality of protrusions 326 are mounted on the back so as to protrude from the circumferentially spaced positions to the front, respectively, in a cylindrical shape. A support pin 3231g, an immersion stopper 3231h that protrudes forward in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g and restricts the rotation end of the back and forth decorative body 3246 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and each support pin 3231g An appearance stopper 323 that protrudes forward in the vicinity and restricts the rotation end of the decorative component 3246 on the back in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. It includes a i, a.

  The back first rotary decorative body 3232 has a deformed polygonal shape, and is larger than the right half disk-shaped portion of the back top movable main body base 3231. Further, the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back is provided with an angular spiral decoration, and is an opaque property comprising a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plating layer. It has a part of. The back first rotary decorative body 3232 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear, and a first shaft portion 3232a that is rotatably inserted into the first rotation support hole 3231d of the back movable main body base 3231; The single shaft portion 3232a is provided with a second rotation support hole 3232b that penetrates back and forth at an eccentric position and for rotatably mounting the second rotating decorative body 3233 on the back. The first rotary ornament body gear 3241 is attached to the rear end of the first shaft portion 3232a of the back first rotary ornament body 3232. Further, the second rotation support hole 3232b is rotatably inserted into the second shaft portion 3233a of the back second rotary decorative body 3233.

  The back second rotary decorative body 3233 has a deformed polygonal shape and is smaller than the back first rotary decorative body 3232. More specifically, the back second rotating decorative body 3233 has a diameter that is approximately half of the diameter of the back first rotating decorative body 3232. Further, the back second rotary decorative body 3233 is provided with an angular spiral decoration, and is a light-impermeable material composed of a colored translucent translucent portion and a metallic luster plating layer. It has a part of. The back second rotary decorative body 3233 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear, and a second shaft portion 3233a that is rotatably inserted into the second rotation support hole 3232b of the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is provided. I have. The second rotating ornament body gear 3242 is attached to the rear end of the second shaft portion 3233a of the back second rotating ornament 3233.

  The back decorative substrate 3234 irradiates light in the direction away from the bosses 3231c (first rotation support holes 3231d) of the plurality of first LEDs 3234a capable of irradiating light forward and the back movable main body base 3231. A plurality of possible second LEDs 3234b are provided. The plurality of first LEDs 3234a and second LEDs 3234b are respectively mounted on the front surface. The back decorative board 3234 includes a flat cable 3234c connected to the back relay board 3219 of the back lifting unit 3210. The flat cable 3234c is sandwiched between the back movable body base 3231 and the base cover 3250.

  The plurality of first LEDs 3234a on the back decorative substrate 3234 face the front from the plurality of openings 3231f of the back movable main body base 3231 when assembled in the back movable main body unit 3230. With the LED 3234a, it is possible to irradiate light from the back side of the back first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233 to decorate them.

  In the state where the plurality of second LEDs 3234b on the back decorative substrate 3234 are assembled on the back movable main body unit 3230, in the vicinity of the respective support pins 3231g in the back top movable main body base 3231 (centering on the first rotation support hole 3231d). Two in the vicinity of the counterclockwise direction side). The second LED 3234b emits light in a state in which the back-and-forth decorative body 3246 partially protrudes, thereby protruding outward from the back-side first rotating decorative body 3232 in the in-and-out decorative portion 3246b of the back-and-forth decorative body 3246. Can be decorated with light emission (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159).

  In the transmission relay gear 3237, the input gear portion 3237 a is formed to have a larger diameter than the rotational drive gear 3236 and the second relay gear 3239, and the output gear portion 3237 b is smaller in diameter than the second relay gear 3239 and the rotational drive gear 3236. The same diameter is formed. The first relay gear 3238 is formed to have the same diameter as the input gear portion 3237 a of the transmission relay gear 3237. The second relay gear 3239 is formed to have the same diameter as the third relay gear 3240 and the first rotating decorative body gear 3241.

  Each of the plurality of back-and-forth decorative bodies 3246 is formed in the same shape. The plurality of back and top ornamental bodies 3246 are provided with five first ornamental and decorative bodies 3246A, 3246A and 3246B, third and third ornamental bodies 3246C, fourth and third ornamental bodies 3246D, and fifth and fifth ornamental bodies 3246E. ing. The back and forth decorative body 3246 penetrates back and forth, and a base 3246a that is rotatably mounted by inserting a support pin 3231g of the back movable main body base 3231, and extends outward from the base 3246a. A protruding and protruding decorative portion 3246b in which a decoration of the mold is formed, a protruding portion 3246c extending from the base 3246a in a direction different from the protruding and protruding decorative portion 3246b, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the tip of the protruding portion 3246c. A contact portion 3246d. The back and forth decorative body 3246 is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative portion 3246b is decorated with a plating layer having a metallic luster. Further, the back and forth decorative body 3246 is provided with a lens portion 3246e that is formed in a triangular shape with a cross section protruding rearward and extending in an arc shape with the base portion 3246a as the center, and a plurality of concentrically formed lens portions 3246e. Yes.

  When assembled on the back movable body unit 3230, the back top decorative structure 3246 is assembled so that the decorative part 3246b is positioned between the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i in the back movable body base 3231. The urging force of the return spring 3249 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is in contact with the immersion stopper 3231h of the back movable body base 3231 (see FIG. 155). In this state, most of the back-side ornamental body 3246 is located immediately behind the back-side first rotating ornament 3232 and is not visible from the front (immersion position state).

  The back side appearance decorative body 3246 is configured such that a contact portion 3246d can come into contact with a first cam member 3247 and a second cam member 3248 attached to the rear side of the back top first rotation decoration body 3232. By contacting the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 that has been circulated by the rotation of the first upper rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side, the base 3246a (the back side movable main body is resisted against the biasing force of the return spring 3249. Rotating in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g) of the base 3231, and the entire back and forth decorative body 3246 rotates in the clockwise direction, so that the protruding and decorative part 3246b becomes the back first rotary decorative body 3232. It moves to the outside and becomes a state (appearance position state) visible from the front. When the back-and-forth decorative body 3246 rotates vigorously in the clockwise direction, the in-and-out decorative part 3246b abuts on the appearance stopper 3231i of the back-side movable main body base 3231, thereby rotating further in the clockwise direction. Is regulated. Then, when the contact between the contact portion 3246d and the first cam member 3247 or the second cam member 3248 is released, the back-up / down decorative body 3246 is rotated counterclockwise by the urging force of the return spring 3249. Return to the initial immersion position.

  The back-and-forth decorative body 3246 is arranged in front of the back-side decorative substrate 3234 in the assembled state on the back-side movable main body unit 3230, and rotates around the base 3246a, so that the in-and-out decorative portion 3246b is arranged. When moving to the outside of the back first rotary decorative body 3232 in front view, the rear surface of the decorative part 3246b is irradiated with light from the second LED 3234b corresponding to the back decorative board 3234. ing. More specifically, when the back and forth decorative body 3246 is at the appearance position, the decorative portion 3246b is positioned in front of the light irradiation direction of the second LED 3234b in the front view, and the rear surface (lens portion) of the decorative portion 3246b. 3246e) is irradiated with light from the second LED 3234b obliquely from behind. The light irradiated obliquely rearward to the lens portion 3246e formed of a plurality of triangular protrusions is refracted at the rear surface of the indented decorative portion 3246b and enters the indented decorative portion 3246b, and the planar front and rear surfaces A part of the light is radiated forward from the front surface (see FIG. 159). As a result, when viewed from the front (player side), the portion of the back and forth decorative body 3246 that protrudes outward from the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 of the decorative portion 3246b appears to shine, The part can be decorated with light emission.

  The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the in / out decoration portion 3246b of the back / in / out decoration body 3246 between an immersion position invisible from the player side and an appearance position visible from the player side. Is. The first cam member 3247 includes a flat plate-shaped rotation detection piece 3247a extending rearward. The rotation detection piece 3247a is detected by the back surface rotation detection sensor 3245 attached to the back surface movable main body base 3231, whereby the rotation position of the back surface first rotation decoration body 3232 can be detected. The first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248, when assembled in the back movable body unit 3230, are rotated by rotating the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 (counterclockwise in the front view). The back-up / down decorative body 3246 can be rotated (in the clockwise direction of the front view) by contacting any one of the contact portions 3246d of the back-up / down decorative body 3246.

  Further, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 have a predetermined angle (about 156 degrees) in the circumferential direction on the circumference of a predetermined radius centered on the first shaft portion 3232a of the back first rotary decorative body 3232. ) It is mounted apart. More specifically, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from each other at an angle different from the angle (72 degrees) at which the plurality (five) of the back and forth decorative bodies 3246 are separated from each other. It is attached to a one-turn decorative body 3232. Thereby, the timing which the 1st cam member 3247 and the 2nd cam member 3248 contact | abut on the contact part 3246d of the back on-and-out decorative body 3246 can be varied, and two back on-and-out decorative bodies 3246 are different. Can be infested at the timing.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3200 is provided with a back upper lift unit 3210 on the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the center in front view, and is provided at the lower right corner of the back upper lift unit 3210. A back movable main unit 3230 is rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212. More specifically, the back movable body unit 3230 has a left and right lifting shaft hole 3231a rotatably attached to the lifting support shaft 3212 of the back lifting unit 3210, and the bottom of the lifting shaft hole 3231a. The action pin 3231b is connected to the drive pin 3216c of the lift link gear member 3216 in the back lift unit 3210 via the lift link member 3217.

  In the back movable body unit 3230, the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotatably attached to the center of the right half disk-shaped portion of the back top movable body base 3231 and the back top second rotation. The decorative body 3233 is rotatably attached to the back first rotary decorative body 3232 at a position eccentric from its center. More specifically, the back first rotary decorative body 3232 has a first shaft portion 3232 a extending rearwardly attached to a first rotation support hole 3231 d of the back top movable main body base 3231. The first shaft portion 3232a is rotated at a rear end thereof from the back rotational drive motor 3235 by a rotational drive gear 3236, a transmission relay gear 3237, a first relay gear 3238, a second relay gear 3239, and a third relay gear 3240. The 1st rotation decoration body gear 3241 transmitted via is attached.

  On the other hand, the back second rotary ornament 3233 has a second shaft portion 3233a extending rearwardly attached to the second rotation support hole 3232b of the back first rotary ornament 3232. The second shaft 3233a is attached to the rear end thereof with a second rotary ornament body gear 3242 that meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back movable body base 3231.

  In the back movable body unit 3230, the back and forth decorative bodies 3246 are rotatably attached to a plurality of (five) support pins 3231g protruding forward in the back movable body base 3231, respectively. The back and forth decorative body 3246 is biased by a return spring 3249 so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

[5-9c-1. Production by a movable production unit on the back]
Next, effects using the back movable movable effect unit 3200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 159 and the like. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the back movable movable unit showing the back movable main unit in the normal raised position, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the lowered movable body unit in the lowered position. It is a front view of a back top movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 154 is a front view of the back movable main body unit schematically showing the rotation of the back top first rotating decorative body and the revolution of the back top second rotating decorative body. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back movable main body unit schematically showing the movements of the plurality of back and forth decorative bodies and the LEDs on the back decorative board. FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back second rotary decoration body and the back top appearance decoration body in the back top movable main body unit according to the rotation angle of the back top first rotation decoration body, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back top 2nd rotation decoration body following 156 according to the rotation angle of a back top 1st rotation decoration body. FIG. 158 (a) is a front view of the back movable main unit that is shown together with the LEDs on the back decorative board in a state where the back first rotated decorative body is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, (B) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the TT line | wire in (a). FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back-and-forth decorative body at the appearance position and the second LED on the back-side decorative board by enlarging the part indicated by the arrow A in FIG.

  In the normal state, the back upper movable production unit 3200 is in a state in which the back upper movable main body unit 3230 extends to the left and right on the right side of the back upper lift unit 3210 in the front view. The back second rotary decorative body 3233 is in the ascending position moving upward. In the state of the raised position, the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 are located on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, and the frame of the center accessory 2500 It is located on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 and is visible from the player side (front) (see FIG. 129, FIG. 135, etc.). In a normal state, the up / down detection piece 3216d of the up / down link gear member 3216 is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3220.

  In the normal (ascending position) state in which the back movable body unit 3230 extends substantially horizontally, the back top first rotation decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotation attached to the right end side of the back top movable body unit 3230. Due to the weight (self-weight) of the decorative body 3233 and the like, a force is applied to rotate the right end side downward (in the clockwise direction of the front view) around the lifting support shaft 3212 on the left end side. . In the back movable main body unit 3230, the action pin 3231b attached to the lift link member 3217 of the back lift unit 3210 is disposed below the lift shaft hole 3231a (lift support shaft 3212). The action pin 3231b tends to move to the left by the force that the back movable body unit 3230 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the lifting link member 3217 attached to the action pin 3231b is pressed to the left via the action pin 3231b by the force that the back movable body unit 3230 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. Power is acting.

  In this raised position state, the extension line connecting the centers of the drive hole 3217a and the action hole 3217b of the lift link member 3217 passes through the upper side of the center of the lift link gear member 3216. By the leftward force acting on the member 3217, the elevating link gear member 3216 tries to rotate in the direction in which the drive pin 3216c inserted in the drive hole 3217a moves upward (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Will be. At this time, since the extending portion 3216b of the lifting / lowering link gear member 3216 is in contact with the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218, the lifting / lowering link gear member 3216 can further rotate in the counterclockwise direction. Instead, the rotation of the lifting link gear member 3216 is restricted and maintained in a stopped state.

  As a result, the back movable body unit 3230 does not rotate in the clockwise direction around the lifting support shaft 3212 by its own weight, but is maintained (locked) in the raised position. Further, in this state, the force to rotate due to the weight of the back movable body unit 3230 acts on the upper stopper portion 3218a of the stopper member 3218 via the extending portion 3216b of the lifting link gear member 3216. Since the link gear member 3216 does not act on the lift relay gear 3215 side meshing with the operation gear portion 3216a of the link gear member 3216, it also acts on the back lift drive motor 3213 via the lift relay gear 3215 and the lift drive gear 3214. There is nothing. Therefore, in the normal state (in the raised position state), it is not necessary to drive the back up / down drive motor 3213, and the load on the back up / down drive motor 3213 can be reduced.

  In the back movable main unit 3230, the rotation detection piece 3247 a of the first cam member 3247 attached to the back first rotation decorative body 3232 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3245. The rotation of the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back upper second rotating decorative body 3233 is stopped. Further, in a normal state, a plurality of (five) back and forth decorative bodies 3246 in the back movable body unit 3230 have first cam members 3247 attached to the rear side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and The second cam member 3248 is not in contact (contact). In this normal state, the plurality of back and top ornamental bodies 3246 are in contact with the immersion stoppers 3231h that restrict the rotation ends in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. In other words, it is in the state of the immersion position that is directly behind the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side. Therefore, the plurality of back and forth decorative bodies 3246 are invisible from the player side (front). Further, in the plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246 that are each in the immersion position, the respective abutting portions 3246d are provided with the first cam member 3247 and the first cam member 3247 attached to the back first rotary decorative body 3232, respectively. The two cam members 3248 are positioned on the turning trajectory.

  In this normal state, when the up / down link gear member 3216 is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front by driving the back up / down drive motor 3213, the drive pin 3216c revolves so as to move downward and to the left. Therefore, the revolving link member 3217 attached to the drive pin 3216c is pulled leftward by the revolution of the drive pin 3216c. When the lifting link member 3217 is pulled to the left, the action pin 3231b of the back movable body base 3231 in the back movable body unit 3230 attached to the action hole 3217b of the lift link member 3217 is pulled to the left. As a result, the back movable main unit 3230 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the lifting support shaft 3212.

  When the back movable body base 3231 in the back movable body unit 3230 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion 3211a of the lift unit base 3211, the drive of the back lift drive motor 3213 is stopped, and the clockwise direction is further increased. The rotation to is restricted. In this state, the back movable main unit 3230 extends substantially vertically, and is in a lowered position in which the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotating decorative body 3233 have moved downward. (See FIG. 153 (b)).

  Since the shock absorber 3221 is attached to the lower stopper portion 3211a, even if the back upper movable main body unit 3230 rotates (moves) vigorously from the raised position to the lowered position, the impact is mitigated to reduce the back. Damage to the upper movable body unit 3230 can be avoided. Further, the shock absorber 3221 can suppress the back movable body unit 3230 from bouncing off at the lower stopper portion 3211a, and can be reliably stopped at the lowered position.

  In the state in which the back movable body unit 3230 is moved to the lowered position, the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotating decorative body 3233 are in the center of the front of the main effect display device 1600 (the game area 5a in front view). (Refer to FIG. 203). As a result, the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the back second spin ornament 3233 are easily visible from the player side, so that the player's interest is the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the second back rotate. While being able to attract strongly to the decoration body 3233, those decorations and the movable effect mentioned later can be enjoyed.

  When the back top rotational drive motor 3235 is driven in the lowered position to rotate the first rotating decorative body gear 3241 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back top first through the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotating decorative body 3232 will rotate in the counterclockwise direction. When the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back rotates around the first shaft portion 3232a (first rotation support hole 3231d), the second shaft penetrates back and forth at a position eccentric to the first shaft portion 3232a. The rotation support hole 3232b revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a. Since the second shaft portion 3233a of the back-side second rotation decoration body 3233 is rotatably attached to the second rotation support hole 3232b, the back-side first rotation decoration body 3232 is centered on the first shaft portion 3232a. When rotated in this manner, the back second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a via the second shaft portion 3233a.

  When the back second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a, the second rotating decorative body gear 3242 attached to the second shaft portion 3233a of the back second rotating decorative body 3233 is also the first. It will revolve around the shaft portion 3232a. The second rotary ornament body gear 3242 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3231e of the back movable body base 3231 formed coaxially with the first shaft portion 3232a. When 3242 revolves around the first shaft portion 3232a (fixed gear portion 3231e), the second rotating decorative body gear 3242 rolls along the outer periphery of the fixed gear portion 3231e due to the meshing of the gear. The rotating decorative body gear 3242 rotates (rotates) around the second shaft portion 3233a (see FIG. 154). Accordingly, when the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the back second rotary decorative body 3233 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while the first shaft portion It will revolve around 3232a.

  In the back movable main body unit 3230, the two first cam members 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are attached to the rear side of the back first rotary ornament 3232, so that the back first rotary ornament 3232 rotates. Then, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 also rotate (revolve around the first shaft portion 3232a). When the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 revolve, two diagonally-exposed upper and lower decorative bodies out of a plurality (five) of the upper and lower decorative bodies 3246 at the immersion positions according to the revolving positions. The abutment decorative portion 3246 is rotated about the support pin 3231g by abutting against the abutting portion 3246d of 3246 and pressing the abutting portion 3246d against the urging force of the return spring 3249, so 3246b can be moved to an appearance position on the outer side in front view with respect to the back first rotary ornament 3232 (see FIG. 155, etc.).

  Each of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 has a rhombus outer periphery, and the abutting portion 3246d slides along the outer periphery of the rhombus with the rotation of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. Move. The movement of the abutting portion 3246d with respect to the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 will be described in detail. First, the inner side of the front side in the rotation direction on the outer periphery of the rhombus of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 is described. After coming into contact with the vicinity of the front end of the facing side and sliding back along the side, it turns back near the rear end of the side and slides forward. Then, after moving from the front end in the rotational direction of the outer periphery of the rhombus to the side facing outward, it slides rearward along the side facing outward and away from the rear end of the rear side facing outward It moves a lot.

  The movement of the back-and-forth decoration body 3246 by the rotation of the back-side first rotation decoration body 3232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. 156 (a) to (c) and (d) to (f) of FIG. 157 are counterclockwise from the normal state (the state of FIG. 156 (a)) when the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise. This shows a state in which it is rotated by 15 degrees in the direction of. First, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the rotation detection piece 3247a of the first cam member 3247 is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3245 and the back upper rotation drive motor 3235 is driven (the back upper first The rotation of the one-rotation decorative body 3232 is stopped, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are separated from the contact portions 3246d of the plurality of back-and-forth decorative bodies 3246. In this state, the first cam member 3247 approaches the contact portion 3246d of the first appearance decorative body 3246A between the contact portions 3246d of the first appearance decorative body 3246A and the fifth appearance decorative body 3246E. Is in position. Further, the second cam member 3248 is located at a substantially intermediate position between the contact portions 3246d of the third appearance ornamental body 3246C and the fourth appearance ornamental body 3246D.

  When the first back decorative body 3232 on the back side is rotated in the counterclockwise direction together with the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 from this normal state, the first cam member 3247 is first moved to the first appearance decoration. The second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth in / out decorative body 3246D disposed diagonally to the first in / out decorative body 3246A. You will be in touch.

  In the state (the state shown in FIG. 156 (b)) when the back first rotary ornament 3232 is rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, the first cam member 3247 is the first appearance ornament. The abutting portion 3246d abuts on the abutting portion 3246d of the 3246A first, and so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the rhombus outer periphery of the first cam member 3247. . As a result, the first in / out decorative body 3246A rotates to some extent clockwise from the inset position around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and the first in / out decorative portion 3246b A part protrudes outward from the back first rotating decorative body 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in a state immediately after coming into contact with the contact portion 3246d of the fourth lug decoration 3246D, and slides backward in the vicinity of the front end of the front side facing the inside of the rhombus outer periphery. The abutting portion 3246d abuts so as to move. As a result, the fourth in / out ornament 3246D starts to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g from the immersion position against the urging force of the return spring 3249.

  In the state where the back first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 156 (b) (the state of FIG. 156 (c)), the first cam member 3247 has a rhombus shape. The abutting portion 3246d abuts so that the front side facing the inside on the outer periphery slides backward and then turns back and slides forward near the front end of the side. As a result, the first appearance decorative body 3246A further rotates in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and is more than half of the star-shaped appearance decoration portion 3246b. Protrudes outward from the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing the inside of the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth infested decorative body 3246D rotates to some extent clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, so that a part of the star-shaped indented decorative portion 3246b is partly rotated. The rear upper first rotating decorative body 3232 protrudes outward.

  Subsequently, in a state where the back upper first rotating decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 156 (c) (state of FIG. 157 (d)), the first cam member 3247 The abutting portion 3246d abuts so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing the outside on the outer periphery of the rhombus. Thus, the first appearance decorative body 3246A further rotates in the clockwise direction around the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249 to the appearance stopper 3231i of the back movable main body base 3231. The appearance position is in contact, and most of the star-shaped appearance decorative portion 3246b protrudes outward from the back-side first rotary ornament 3232. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 has an abutting portion 3246d abutting so that the front side facing the inner side of the outer periphery of the rhombus slides backward and then folds back and slides forward near the front end of the side. Yes. As a result, the fourth appearance decorative body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249, and most of the star-shaped appearance decoration portion 3246b is back. The upper first rotating decorative body 3232 protrudes outward.

  Further, in the state in which the back first rotary ornament 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 157 (d) (the state of FIG. 157 (e)), the first cam member 3247 The abutting portion 3246d is separated rearward from the side facing the outside on the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the first intruding decorative body 3246A is rotated counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and is in contact with the intrusion stopper 3231h of the back movable body base 3231. The star-shaped appearance ornamental part 3246b is located inside the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side. On the other hand, the second cam member 3248 is in contact with the contact portion 3246d so as to slide backward in the middle of the front side facing outward on the outer periphery of the rhombus. As a result, the fourth in / out decorative body 3246D further rotates clockwise around the support pin 3231g against the urging force of the return spring 3249 and contacts the appearance stopper 3231i of the back movable main body base 3231. The appearance position is in contact with each other, and most of the star-shaped appearance ornamental portion 3246b protrudes outward from the first rotary ornament 3232 on the back side.

  Further, in the state where the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is further rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 157 (e) (the state of FIG. 157 (f)), the first cam member 3247 is Near the front edge of the front side facing the inner side of the outer periphery of the rhombus, which is in contact with the contact portion 3246d of the next second decorative element 3246B (disposed diagonally with respect to the fourth decorative element 3246D) The abutting portion 3246d abuts so as to slide backward. Thus, the second retractable decorative body 3246B starts to rotate clockwise from the retracted position about the support pin 3231g against the biasing force of the return spring 3249. On the other hand, in the second cam member 3248, the abutment portion 3246d of the fourth appearance decorative body 3246D is separated rearward from the side facing the outside of the outer periphery of the rhombus, and the fourth appearance decorative body 3246D and the fifth appearance decorative body 3246E. Are located in the vicinity of the middle between the contact portions 3246d. As a result, the fourth intruding decorative body 3246D rotates counterclockwise around the support pin 3231g by the biasing force of the return spring 3249, and is in contact with the intrusion stopper 3231h of the back movable body base 3231h. The star-shaped appearance ornamental part 3246b is located inside the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back side.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 155, 158, and 159, the back movable main unit 3230 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3234a that irradiate light forward on the back decorative substrate 3234. By appropriately emitting the first LED 3234a, the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the second back ornament 3233 can be illuminated. When the first LED 3234a of the backside decorative substrate 3234 is caused to emit light appropriately while the backside first rotating decorative body 3232 and the backside second rotating decorative body 3233 are rotated, the backside first rotating decorative body 3232 and the backside Due to the overlap with the second rotating decorative body 3233 and the non-translucent parts of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233, etc. Can show.

  In addition, the back decorative substrate 3234 irradiates light outward in the radial direction around the first rotation support hole 3231d in the vicinity of each support pin 3231g in the back movable main body base 3231. Since the LED 3234b is provided, as shown in FIG. 158, the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate the back of the immersion position. When the upper appearance decoration body 3246 is moved to the appearance position, the second LED 3234b corresponding to the upper appearance decoration body 3246 is caused to emit light, whereby the upper appearance decoration body 3246 at the appearance position (the appearance decoration portion 3246b). Can be decorated with luminous.

  More specifically, when the second LED 3234b of the corresponding back decorative substrate 3234 is caused to emit light to the back and forth decorative body 3246 at the appearance position, a part of the light diffused from the second LED 3234b is displayed and displayed. On the rear side of the portion 3246b, a plurality of protrusions having a triangular cross section can be reflected and refracted to the front side by a lens portion 3246e arranged concentrically, and light that has entered the interior of the appearance decoration portion 3246b is irregularly reflected inside. After that, a part is radiated forward, and the star-shaped appearance decorative portion 3246b can be decorated with light emission (see FIGS. 158 (b) and 159). As a result, the appearance decoration portion 3246b of the back appearance ornamental body 3246 positioned outside the back first rotation decoration body 3232 (the back decoration substrate 3234) can be illuminated and decorated, so that the back decoration substrate is located directly behind. Since the appearance decoration part 3246b in which 3234 is not arranged is decorated with light emission, it is possible to make the player wonder, and to make the player entertained and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this way, according to the back movable production unit 3200, the back up / down drive motor 3213 moves the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233 between the raised position and the lowered position. Therefore, by moving the back first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233 to the lowered position which is the center of the game area 5a, the player's interest is back on the first rotation decoration body. The body 3232 and the back-side second rotary decoration body 3233 can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, with the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the back second rotary ornament 3233 in the lowered position, the back first rotary ornament 3232 is rotated counterclockwise by the back rotation drive motor 3235. When rotated, the back second rotating decorative body 3233 arranged on the front side of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction. And the plurality of back-and-forth appearance ornamental bodies 3246 (indentation and ornamental portions 3246b) arranged on the rear side of the back-side first rotation ornament 3232 can be revolved at different timings. It can appear outside 3232.

  More specifically, when the back first rotary ornament 3232 is rotated by the back rotation drive motor 3235, the back second rotary ornament 3233 rotates on the front side of the rotating back first rotary ornament 3232. However, since it revolves, it is possible to show the player the movement that feels swirling with the back first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233. Further, when the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 rotate together with the back first rotary decorative body 3232, and the first cam member. Since the distance from the center of rotation of the portion of the outer peripheral surface of 3247 and the second cam member 3248 where the abutting portion 3246d of the back and forth decorative body 3246 abuts changes, the first cam member 3247 and The second cam member 3248 guides the contact portion 3246d in the direction away from the center of rotation, so that the back-and-out decorative body 3246 is opposed to the biasing force of the return spring 3249 via the contact portion 3246d. , And the appearance decoration part 3246b can be moved to the appearance position on the outside of the first rotation decoration body 3232 on the back of the front view. It can show the movements as above the first rotary decorations plurality of back on infested ornamental body outside the 3232 3246 (retractable decorative portion 3246B) infested with Pyokopyoko the player.

  Further, when the second LED 3234b of the backside decorative board 3234 is caused to emit light in a state in which the protruding and appearing decorative part 3246b of the backside decorative body 3246 is positioned outside the backside first rotating decorative body 3232, the light is inclined. The lens portion 3246e of the back and forth decorative body 3246 is irradiated from the back, and a part of the light incident from the lens portion 3246e is diffused and radiated forward after being irregularly reflected in the decorative portion 3246b. When viewed from the player's side, the appearance decoration part 3246b protruding outside the first rotary decoration body 3232 on the back side appears to be shining, and the appearance decoration part 3246b can be lit and decorated. It can be made easy to notice the appearance of the appearance decoration body 3246 (the appearance decoration part 3246b). On the other hand, when the first LED 3234a of the back decoration board 3234 is caused to emit light, the back first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233 that are moving in a swirling feeling can be illuminated and decorated.

  This makes it possible to show the player a moving effect that swirls and scatters stars, giving a strong impact to the player, and something good for the player It can be thought that there is a thing, and it can raise the expectation with respect to a game, and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In addition, when the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the backside decorative substrate 3234 are caused to emit light, the decorative portion 3246b shines from the glittering swirl caused by the backside second rotating decorative body 3233 and the backside first rotating decorative body 3232. However, since the player can show the effect of moving out (movable effect and light emission effect), the player can show the effects of multiple decorations and the effect of the light, making the effect monotonous. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to have a strong impact on the player, and the player's sense of expectation for the game (occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) Can be changed to certainty, and the player can be greatly enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the rear surface of the rear upper movable effect unit 3200 is located at the rising position on the upper right side of the main effect display device 1600 in the vicinity of the periphery of the front view game area 5a. A back top first rotating decorative body 3232 that is rotatably attached to the back top movable body base 3231 of the top movable body unit 3230 is disposed in a state where its rotation is stopped. In this state, since the back second rotary decoration body 3233 is disposed on the front side of the back first rotation decoration body 3232, the back top second rotation decoration body 3233 and the back top first rotation decoration body 3232 are arranged. In addition, the plurality of (five) back and top ornamental bodies 3246 are placed in the immersive positions directly behind the back top first rotational ornament 3232 by the biasing force of the return spring 3249, The back and forth decorative body 3246 is blocked by the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and cannot be seen, and only the decoration by the back top second rotating decorative body 3233 and the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 is clearly shown. Can show. In this state, when the first LED 3234a of the backside decorative board 3234 is caused to emit light, a plurality of backside appearance decorative bodies 3246, a backside first rotating decorative body 3232, and a backside top Since the two-rotation decorative body 3233 has translucency, light from the first LED 3234a can be radiated to the player side through them, and the second rotary decoration on the back as seen from the player side. The body 3233 and the back first rotating decorative body 3232 can be illuminated. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the back second rotary decoration body 3233 and the back first rotation decoration body 3232, and decorate the vicinity of the periphery of the game area 5a in the game area 5a ( The appearance of the pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Further, the back movable main body base 3231 to which the back top first rotating decorative body 3232, the back top second rotating decorative body 3233, and the plurality of back top protruding decorative bodies 3246 are attached is mounted on the back of the back lifting unit 3210. When the elevating drive motor 3213 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the back first rotary decoration body 3232 is positioned at the center of the game area 5a. The second rotating decoration body 3233 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be attracted to the back first rotating decoration body 3232 and the back second rotating decoration body 3233 and It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Furthermore, when the back surface first rotation decorative body 3232 is rotated by the back surface rotation drive motor 3235 and the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b of the back surface decoration board 3234 are caused to emit light, the back surface second rotational decoration body 3233 and the back surface are rotated. The appearance decoration part 3246b jumps out of the shining swirling swirl by the upper first rotating decorative body 3232, or the appearing decoration 3426b is sucked in by the shining swirling swirl (movable) It is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect). As described above, when a presentation is performed using the back second rotary decoration body 3233, the back first rotation decoration body 3232, the plurality of back surface appearance decoration bodies 3246, and the back top decoration board 3234, in the conventional pachinko machine, It is possible to show the player the effects of multiple decorative bodies that cannot be seen and the effects of light, making it difficult for the player to get bored by preventing the effects from becoming monotonous. It can give a strong impact, can change the player's expectation for the game (the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage) with certainty, greatly delights the player and suppresses the decline in interest Can be made.

  In addition, a plurality of back-and-forth appearance ornamental bodies 3246 (investment-and-decoration portions 3246b) appear at different timings on the outer side of the back-side first rotation decoration body 3232 and are decorated with light emission, so that a plurality of light-emitting decorated back and forth appearances are displayed. Since the periphery of the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is brightened by the decorative body 3246, the player can be surely noticed that a plurality of back and forth decorative bodies 3246 have appeared, and the above-described effects can be obtained. The player can be surely played, can have a strong impact on the player, can increase the player's expectation for the game, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the back first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back second rotary decorative body 3233 can be decorated with light emission, when the back top recessed decorative body 3246 is in the immersive position, the first LED 3234a causes the back By making the first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233 to be illuminated, the player can be focused on the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back second rotating decorative body 3233. In the state, the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated by the back top rotation driving motor 3235 to cause the back top recessed and decorative body 3246 to appear, and the second LED 3234b causes the back and forth decorative body 3246b to emit light. By decorating, the player can surely show the appearance of the back and forth decorative body 3246, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely exhibited. It is possible.

  Further, as described above, since the plurality of back surface appearance decoration bodies 3246 that appear outside the first back rotation decoration body 3232 can be illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the back surface appearance decoration body 3246 (the appearance decoration portion). 3246b) is decorated with a light emission, although the decoration substrate 3246 with the LED is provided on the back side of the decorative element 3246 on the back side, the decorative element 3246 on the back side emits a light element. And the player's interest can be attracted to the back and forth decorative body 3246 to entertain the luminous decoration.

  Further, light is emitted from the second LED 3234b of the back decorative board 3234 attached to the back movable main body base 3231 to the lens portion 3246e on the rear surface of the protrusion / decrease decorative portion 3246b protruding outside the back top first rotating decorative body 3232. , And the decoration part 3246b is decorated with light emission, and only the back-and-forth decoration body 3246 is moved. Therefore, the decoration board provided with LEDs on the back side of the back-and-forth decoration body 3246 The weight to be moved can be reduced as compared with the case where the player is attached, and the moving speed (inverted speed) of the decorative element 3246 on the back side can be relatively increased, so that the player can move up and down on the back side. The movement (movable effect) of the decorative body 3246 can be enjoyed. Further, since the back decorative board 3234 is not attached to the moving back and forth decorative body 3246, the wiring of the back decorative board 3234 is not repeatedly fatigued even if the back and forth decorative body 3246 is moved. , The disconnection can be prevented, the back and forth decorative body 3246 can be surely decorated with light emission, and the disconnection can prevent the game from being interrupted and causing discomfort to the player, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, when the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated, the back second rotary decorative body 3233 revolves while rotating on the front side of the rotating back first rotary decorative body 3232, and the back first first. Since the appearance decoration part 3246b with the light emission decoration of the plurality of back appearance decorations 3246 appears on the outside of the rotary decoration 3232, it can give a strong impact to the player and attract the player's attention strongly. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, because of the above-described effects, the back-up second rotary ornament 3233, which can be suitably used for a gaming machine in which an effect suggesting a special lottery result is executed, such as a pachinko machine, It is possible to provide an effect unit (back upper movable effect unit 3200) including the first rotating decorative body 3232, the plurality of back upper and lower decorative bodies 3246, and the back upper decorative substrate 3234.

  In addition, since the first and second cam members 3247 and 3248 are rotated (revolved), the back and forth decorative portion 3246b of the back and forth decorative body 3246 is projected and retracted. It is not necessary to separately provide the drive means and the drive means for rotating the back first rotary decorative body 3232, and a space can be ensured accordingly. The rotating decorative body 3232 and the back and forth decorative body 3246 can be enlarged, and the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back and forth decorative body 3246 are made conspicuous so that the production effect can be sufficiently exhibited. Can do. Further, since it is not necessary to provide driving means for driving the back-side first rotating ornament 3232, the back-side second rotating ornament 3233, and the back-and-forth decorative body 3246, the back-side first rotating ornament 3232 is provided. In addition, it is possible to reduce the control load on the movable effect using the back second rotary decorative body 3233 and the back and forth decorative body 3246, and it is possible to reliably enjoy the movable effect by preventing overload.

  In addition, the back and forth first rotating decorative body is configured so that the appearance timings of the appearance decorative portions 3246b of the plurality of back and forth decorative bodies 3246 are made different depending on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248. It is possible to reduce the monotonous movement by changing the movements of the 3232 and the plurality of appearance decoration portions 3246b, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back-up / down decorative body 3246 is biased in the direction of the retracted position by the return spring 3249, the outer peripheral surfaces of the first cam member 3247 and the second cam member 3248 are backed by the biasing force of the return spring 3249. The contact surface 3246d of the upper and lower decorative body 3246 can be made to be a contact surface, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the guide portion for guiding the contact portion 3246d is a groove or a ridge. It is possible to reduce the increase in cost required for assembling the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the space required for the mechanism of the appearance and appearance of the back and forth decorative body 3246 to easily secure the space. By increasing the size of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back top appearing decorative body 3246, it is possible to make it easier to attract the player's interest.

  In addition, the back and forth decorative body 3246 is rotated around the base 3246a so that the up and down decorative part 3246b appears and disappears. Since the appearance position of the appearance decoration part 3246b appearing outside the one-turn decoration body 3232 is changed, the light trajectory extending in the arc can be shown to the player by the light emission decoration appearance part 3246b, It is possible to make the player notice the movement by making the movement of the back and top decorative body 3246 conspicuous, and to attract the player's attention strongly, and the movement and the appearance of the back first rotating decorative body 3232 The movement of the decoration part 3246b can be given a sense of unity, and the first back decoration body 3232 on the back and a plurality of appearance decoration parts 3246b can dynamically move. With the movable effect can be shown to the player who can give a strong impact to the player, to delight the player can be achieved reliably effects described above.

  Further, since the appearance decoration portion 3246b of the back and forth decoration body 3246 is caused to rotate by rotating it, the appearance and sliding of the back and forth decoration body 3246 is increased compared to the case where the back appearance and decoration body 3246 is slid. Such resistance can be reduced. Therefore, when the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated by driving the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the appearance decoration part 3246b of the back appearance decoration 3246 can be surely brought in and out, and the effect of the movable effect can be achieved. Can be exhibited reliably. In addition, since the occurrence of a problem that the back-and-forth decorative body 3246 does not move due to resistance (sliding resistance) can be reduced, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the problem can be prevented. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the movement range of the back / up / down decorative body 3246 can be regulated by the immersion stopper 3231h and the appearance stopper 3231i provided on the back movable main body base 3231, the back / up / down decorative body 3246 can be quickly moved up and down. However, it does not move beyond the immersive position or the appearance position, and the back upper appearance ornamental body 3246 can be reliably moved between the immersive position and the appearance position.

  Furthermore, when the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotating decorative body 3233 are respectively rotated, the outer periphery of each is formed into a non-circular deformed polygonal shape. Can be clearly recognized, and the player can be noticed by the rotation (movable effect) of the back first rotary ornament 3232 and the second back ornament 3233. Further, when the back-side first rotary ornament 3232 and the back-side second rotary ornament 3233 are rotated, the respective shaft cores (the first shaft portion 3232a and the second shaft portion 3233a) are eccentric from each other. Therefore, they can appear to the player as if they are rotating in a rattling manner, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back rear movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 168. FIG. 160 is a front view of the rear rear movable production unit in the rear unit, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable production unit in the rear unit, and FIG. 162 shows the rear rear movable production unit in the rear unit. It is the perspective view seen from back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable effect unit divided into the fixed side unit side and the turntable side, and is viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the turning table side of the back-back movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the turning table side of the back-and-back movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the turning table side of the back-back movable effect unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back.

  The back rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The back rear movable effect unit 3300 includes a back rear center movable effect unit 3350 attached to the back box 3010, a back rear left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, and left and right. A back rear right movable effect unit 3500, a back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and a back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 attached to the upper side of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350; The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 are provided. The rear upper movable effect unit 3600 includes a sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600.

[5-9e. Backward center movable production unit]
Next, the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 172. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the turning configuration of the turning table in the back center movable effect unit in the front view of the back back movable effect unit. The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 is attached to the front side of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 passes through the frame from the front. It is formed in a frame shape so that it can be visually recognized. The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 includes a fixed side unit 3360 mounted in the back box 3010, and an annular turntable that is rotatably mounted around a front and rear axis on the front side of the fixed side unit 3360. 3380. The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 is provided with the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 on the turning table 3380. Thus, they can be turned around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the game area 5a (main effect display device 1600).

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like, the fixed side unit 3360 of the back center movable effect unit 3350 has an annular table storage portion 3361a for storing the turning table 3380 from the front, and the table storage portion. A unit base 3361 having a square opening 3361b penetrating forward and backward inside 3361a, and attached to the unit base 3361, the swivel table 3380 housed in the table housing portion 3361a is moved forward. A plurality of regulated table supporters 3362 and a plurality of columnar guides that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction along the outer periphery of the table accommodating portion 3361a and project forward from the front end of the table accommodating portion 3361a. Pin 3363 and each guide pin 3363 can be rotated The plurality of guide bushes 3364 that can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the swivel table 3380 and the outer peripheral surface is accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361a, and can be rotated outside the lower end of the table accommodating portion 3361a in the unit base 3361 And a pair of guide rollers 3365 with which the outer peripheral surface of the turntable 3380 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface.

  A plurality of fixed side units 3360 are attached to the unit base 3361, a plurality (here, three) of turning detection sensors 3366 for detecting the turning position of the turning table 3380, and a table housing portion on the front surface of the unit base 3361. It is attached to the outside of 3361a, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 and the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back A drive motor and a decorative board provided in the lower movable effect unit 3700, and three table base relay boards 3367 relaying the connection with the sub effect display device 3640 are provided.

  Further, the fixed side unit 3360 has a rear rear turning drive motor 3370 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3361 and a spur gear-like drive attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear turning drive motor 3370. A gear 3371, a large-diameter spur gear-like input gear 3372a meshing with the drive gear 3371, and an output gear 3372b that rotates integrally with the input gear 3372a and has a smaller diameter than the input gear 3372a and a spur gear-like shape. The swivel gear 3372 rotatably attached to the unit base 3361 and the output gear 3372b of the swivel gear 3372 are meshed with the swivel table 3380 housed in the table housing portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. Engage with swivel gear 3384 and rotate to unit base 3361 And in that the spur gear-like pivot pinion gear 3373 that is attached to, and a (see Figure 169, etc.).

  The unit base 3361 of the fixed side unit 3360 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape corresponds to the inside of the back box 3010, and is provided with an annular table accommodating portion 3361a so as to constitute the outer shape and touch the four sides. Yes. The table accommodating portion 3361a is composed of a rear wall portion formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width on the front surface of the general surface of the unit base 3361, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion protruding forward from the outer periphery of the rear wall portion. ing. The table accommodating portion 3361a can accommodate the turning table 3380 inside the peripheral wall portion. The opening 3361 b of the unit base 3361 is formed in a size corresponding to the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 163 and the like, the unit base 3361 has a relief-like three-dimensional decoration formed on the inner front surface of the table accommodating portion 3361a.

  The table supporter 3362 is provided on each of the upper side and the lower side with respect to an axis extending vertically through the center of the annular table storage portion 3361a in front view, and two on each of the left and right sides. ing. That is, six table supporters 3362 are provided, and are respectively arranged in the vicinity of the hexagonal apex in contact with the table accommodating portion 3361a.

  The guide pins 3363 protrude forward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion of the annular table storage portion 3361a, and a plurality (eight in this case) are provided along the outer periphery of the table storage portion. The plurality of guide pins 3363 are arranged symmetrically with respect to an axis extending vertically through the center (swivel center) of the table accommodating portion 3361a. The four guide pins 3363 disposed on the right side of the axis extending vertically through the turning center are 35 degrees, 60 degrees, 120 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper apex (upper end) of the table accommodating portion 3361a. It is provided at a position of 142 degrees. More specifically, the guide pin 3363 positioned at an angle of 35 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction by an angle of 25 degrees. The guide pins adjacent in the counterclockwise direction are separated by an angle of 70 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction by an angle of 60 degrees. Guide pins adjacent in the clockwise direction are separated by an angle of 25 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 at an angle of 120 degrees in the clockwise direction from the upper end of the table accommodating portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction by an angle of 22 degrees. The guide pins adjacent in the clockwise direction are separated by 60 degrees. Further, the guide pin 3363 positioned at an angle of 142 degrees clockwise from the upper end of the table housing portion 3361a is separated from the guide pin 3363 adjacent in the clockwise direction by an angle of 76 degrees. The guide pins adjacent in the clockwise direction are separated by an angle of 22 degrees.

  In other words, the two guide pins 3363 arranged on the uppermost side on both the left and right sides are separated from each other by an angle of 70 degrees in the turning direction. Further, the two guide pins 3363 arranged closest to both the upper and lower sides with respect to the horizontally extending axis passing through the turning center are separated from each other by an angle of 60 degrees in the turning direction. Furthermore, the two guide pins 3363 arranged on the lowermost side on both the left and right sides are spaced apart at an angle of 76 degrees in the turning direction. The two upper guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an angle of 25 degrees in the turning direction, and the two lower guide pins 3363 on the left and right sides are separated by an interval of 22 degrees in the turning direction. Yes.

  These guide pins 3363 are formed so as to come into contact with the sides of the slide frame 3630 when the slide frame 3630 of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is in the retracted position, and are attached to the slide frame 3630. Movement of the effect display device 3640 in the turning direction can be restricted. If the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees or more, the slide frame 3630 of the rear upper movable production unit 3600 can be positioned between the two guide pins 3363. When the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 60 degrees, the range of the pivotable angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) positioned between them is 0 degree, and the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 70 degrees. When the angle is 60 degrees, the range of the turning angle of the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) positioned between them is ± 5 degrees, and when the interval between the two guide pins 3363 is 76 degrees, The range of the turning angle of the positioned slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is ± 8 degrees.

  On the other hand, if the angle between the two adjacent guide pins 3363 is smaller than 60 degrees, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 comes into contact with the guide pins 3363, and the slide frame 3630 ( The movement of the sub effect display device 3640) to the retracted position can be restricted. Therefore, the plurality of guide pins 3363 allow the back movable production unit to be positioned immediately above the turning center (first turning position), rightly located at the turning center (second turning position), and immediately below the turning center. Only at the position (third turning position), the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is restricted so that it can move to the retracted position, and the turning angle range in the turning direction is restricted at each position. can do.

  The pair of guide rollers 3365 are provided on both the left and right sides of the table supporter 3362 arranged immediately below the turning center. The guide roller 3365 is a ball bearing.

  The turning detection sensor 3366 detects the turning position of the turning table 3380 by detecting the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380. The turning detection sensor 3366 includes a first turning detection sensor 3366a that detects that the turning table 3380 is located at the first turning position, and a second that detects that the turning table 3380 is located at the second turning position. The turning detection sensor 3366b and the third turning detection sensor 3366c for detecting that the turning table 3380 is located at the third turning position are configured.

  The swivel table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 has a shallow dish-shaped main body 3381 whose outer periphery is a circle of a size that can be accommodated in the table accommodating portion 3361a of the unit base 3361, and a main body 3381. A through-hole 3382 penetrating the bottom wall in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 3383 projecting outward from the front end of the main body portion 3381 in a flat plate shape and having an outer diameter larger than that of the table housing portion 3361a, Rotating gear 3384 projecting forward from the front surface of flange portion 3383 and gear teeth facing radially outward are arranged in an arc shape, and projecting outward from flange portion 3383 and detected by turning detection sensor 3366. A flat plate-shaped detection piece 3385.

  The swivel table 3380 is formed in an annular shape by a main body portion 3381, a through-hole 3382, and a flange portion 3383, and the rear side of the flange portion 3383 is accommodated in the table accommodation portion 3361a of the unit base 3361. The swivel table 3380 has the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 3383 in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the guide bush 3364 fitted in the guide pin 3363 and the outer peripheral surface of the guide roller 3365, respectively, so that the fixed side unit 3360 is in contact. It is attached so that it can rotate around a shaft extending back and forth. The turntable 3380 is configured such that the table supporter 3362 is slidably in contact with the front surface of the flange portion 3383, and the front end of the table storage portion 3361a (peripheral wall portion) is slidable on the rear surface of the flange portion 3383. It comes to contact. Thereby, the turntable 3380 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the fixed-side unit 3360.

  The swivel gear 3384 of the swivel table 3380 is rotated clockwise from a position rotated about 30 degrees clockwise from the upper apex with respect to an axis extending vertically through the center of the annular swivel table 3380. It is formed so as to extend in an arc shape up to an angle position rotated about 280 degrees in the direction. In the assembled state in the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the turning pinion gear 3373 is meshed with the turning gear 3384 from the outside, and the turning gear 3371 is turned by the rear back turning drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the turning transmission gear 3372. When the pinion gear 3373 is rotated, the turning table 3380 can be rotated via the turning gear 3384.

  Further, the swivel table 3380 is provided symmetrically on the upper side of the through hole 3382 and in the upper part of the front surface of the main body 3381 with an axis extending vertically passing through the swivel center in between, and extends linearly up and down. A pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 and a plurality of guide bosses 3387 projecting forward in a columnar shape between the pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body portion 3381 are provided. The pair of fixed-side rack gears 3386 mesh with a slide gear 3620 attached to a slide plate 3610 of a back-upper / lower movable effect unit 3600, which will be described later, and are attached to a slide frame 3630 via the slide plate 3610. This is used to move the effect display device 3640 between the retracted position and the protruding position. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 3387 are provided two by two symmetrically with an axis extending vertically through the turning center in between, and spaced apart vertically. The plurality of guide bosses 3387 are for movably attaching a slide plate 3610 of the back and rear upper movable effect unit 3600 described later.

[5-9e-1. Production by the rear center movable production unit]
Next, effects using the back center movable effect unit 3350 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the turning of the turning table in the counterclockwise direction in the back center movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the turning of the turning table in the clockwise direction in the rear center movable effect unit, and FIG. 172 schematically shows the turning of the turning table following FIG. 171 in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing.

  In the normal state, the back center movable effect unit 3350 has the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 detected by the first turning detection sensor 3366a attached to the upper left in the front view among the three turning detection sensors 3366. (See FIGS. 170 (a) and 171 (a)). That is, the turning table 3380 is in the first turning position. In this normal state, when the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back and rear turning drive motor 3370 via the drive gear 3371 and the turning transmission gear 3372, the turning table 3380 is rotated counterclockwise. It can be rotated in the direction to a rotation angle of 80 degrees (see FIG. 170 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear back turning drive motor 3370 from the normal state, the turning table 3380 can be rotated clockwise. By turning the turning table 3380 by 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the turning table 3380 can be brought into the second turning position (see FIG. 171 (b)). In the state of the second turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the second turning detection sensor 3366b disposed at the upper right of the front view.

  When the turning table 3380 is further rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the second turning position, the turning table 3380 can be brought into the state of the third turning position (see FIG. 172 (c)). In the state of the third turning position, the detection piece 3385 of the turning table 3380 is detected by the third turning detection sensor 3366c arranged at the lower right of the front view. The turning table 3380 can further rotate 10 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the third turning position (see FIG. 172 (d)).

  As described above, according to the back center movable effect unit 3350, the back back left movable effect unit 3400, the back back right movable effect unit 3500, the back back upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back back attached to the turning table 3380. The lower movable effect unit 3700 is turned within a predetermined angle range (80 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to 190 degrees in the clockwise direction) around the turning center (the center of the main effect display device 1600). Can be made.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of rear rear left movable production unit and rear rear right movable production unit]
Next, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a front perspective view of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 174 shows the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 175 shows that the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit are disassembled into a back rear left movable decorative body unit, a back rear right movable decorative body unit, a back rear left slide unit, and a back rear right slide unit. 176 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 176 shows a back rear left movable effect unit and a back rear right movable effect unit, a back rear left movable decorative body unit, a back rear right movable decorative body unit, a back rear left slide unit, and It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the back back right slide unit and was seen from the back.

  The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are attached to the front surface of the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back box 3010. The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right move effect unit 3500 are each provided with a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510, and a back back left movable decoration body unit 3401 and a back back. The right movable ornament body unit 3501 and the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 are attached to the front surfaces of the turning table 3380, respectively, and the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 are moved away from the turning center. The rear back left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 are respectively provided to move between the separation position and the approach position approaching the turning center.

  The back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (the surface of the panel board 1110). A plurality of back-rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back-rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 that are rotatable around an axis along the surface are provided. The back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable decoration unit 3400 and the back rear right movable presentation unit 3500 are a back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and a back rear right rotation decoration body 3510. , By changing the portion of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 that can be seen from the player side (front side), the decoration can be changed.

  Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 have axes extending vertically through the turning center on the front surface of the turning table 3380. It is mounted symmetrically on the border. The back back left slide unit 3460 and the back back right slide unit 3560 move the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 away from the center (turn center) of the turn table 3380, and the periphery of the turn table 3380. It can be slid linearly between the separation position located in the vicinity and the approach position approaching the center of the turning table 3380.

  The back rear left movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right movable production unit 3500 rotate together with the turn table 3380 because the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 are attached to the turn table 3380. Thus, the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 can turn around the turning center (centering around the center of the main effect display device 1600).

[5-9f-1. Left rear movable decorative unit]
The back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the back back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 139. FIG. 177 is a front view of the back rear left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit in the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit, and FIG. 178 is the back rear left movable production unit. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the back rear left movable decoration body unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit in the back rear right movable performance unit, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left movable ornament body unit and the back back right movable ornament body unit from back. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is a back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit, as seen from the front by disassembling the back rear left rotated decorative body, the back rear right rotated decorative body, and the rotation connecting mechanism. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left rotating decorative body and the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit and the rotary connecting mechanism as viewed from behind. FIG. FIG. 184 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary coupling mechanism in an assembled state, and FIG. 184 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary coupling mechanism. FIG. 185 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back back left movable decoration body unit in the back back left movable effect unit from the left side, and FIG. 185 (b) is the back back left movable decoration in the back back left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable member of a body unit from the front. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back back left rotating decorative body in the back back left movable decorative body unit of the back back left movable effect unit.

  The back back left movable decoration body unit 3401 of the back back left movable effect unit 3400 includes a plurality of (here, four) back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 provided with a predetermined decoration as shown in the figure. The plurality of back rear left rotated decorative bodies 3410 are, from the bottom, the first back rear left rotated decorative body 3410A, the second back rear left rotated decorative body 3410B, the third back rear left rotated decorative body 3410C, and the fourth back rear. A left rotation decorative body 3410D is provided. These back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 swells in a semi-cylindrical shape, and extends in a disk shape obliquely from the end of the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3411a simulating the body portion of the spotlight. A decorative body main body 3411 having a second decorative portion 3411b simulating the lens portion of the lens and a third decorative portion 3411c extending in a flat shape on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3411a and having a predetermined character applied thereto; The decorative body main body 3411 includes a shaft portion 3412 that protrudes from two side surfaces that intersect the end portion of the second decorative portion 3411b.

  The decorative body main body 3411 of the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body main body 3411 is formed so that the second decorative portion 3411b can be visually recognized when the first decorative portion 3411a faces the front. The third decorative portion 3411c of the decorative body main body 3411 is not shown in the figure, but is decorated with one character that forms one word by the four back-back left rotated decorative bodies 3410.

  The four back-rear rotation decorative bodies 3410 have the respective shaft portions 3412 having a predetermined radius so that each second decorative portion 3411b faces the center side with each first decorative portion 3411a facing the front. Arranged along an arc.

  The back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is attached to a flat back back left base 3420 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width and a front side of the back back left base 3420, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. The back back left decorative board 3421 and the transparent back back left base cover 3422 attached to the back back left base 3420 so as to cover the front side of the back back left decorative board 3421 are provided.

  The back rear left base 3420 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3420a that is slidably mounted on the upper portion by the slide shaft 3462 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the slide guide 3463 of the back rear left slide unit 3460 at the lower portion. A cylindrical slide pin 3420b, and a pair of long slit-shaped slide slits 3420c that are formed vertically symmetrically in the vicinity of the left end in the front view and extend vertically. , And a detection piece 3420 d that protrudes upward from the upper portion and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3474 of the back rear left slide unit 3460. The slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 in the back rear left slide unit 3460 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c in the back rear left base 3420, respectively.

  The back back left decorative board 3421 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back back left rotation decoration body 3410, and these four LEDs attach the shaft portion 3412 of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410. In between, there are two each. In other words, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back back left decorative board 3421 are respectively arranged on the inside and outside of the arc in which the four back back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 are arranged. Note that the LED on the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 is a full color LED.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has a rear side of the upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotated decorative body 3410A and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back rear left rotated decorative body 3410B. A bearing base lower 3423 that is rotatably supported and attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B, and a third back back left rotation decoration body 3410C. A middle 3424 of a bearing stand that rotatably supports the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3412 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422, and an upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C. And an upper bearing stand 3425 that rotatably supports the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. There.

  Further, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3412 of the first back back left rotated decorative body 3410A and is attached to the front surface of the back back left base cover 3422. The first bearing cover 3426 to which the decoration is applied, and the front side of the shaft part 3412 on the upper side of the first back left rotation decoration body 3410A and the shaft part 3412 on the lower side of the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B. , And a second bearing cover 3427 which is attached to the front surface of the lower bearing stand 3423 and has a front surface decoration, a shaft portion 3412 on the upper side of the second back left rotation decoration body 3410B, and a second one. A third shaft that rotatably supports the front side of the lower shaft portion 3412 of the three-side rear left rotation decorative body 3410C and is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3424 and is decorated on the front surface. The front side of the cover 3428 and the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D are rotatably supported and a bearing base. A fourth bearing cover 3429 attached to the front surface of the upper 3425 and decorated on the front surface, and a shaft portion 3412 on the upper side of the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D are rotatably supported and the back rear left base A fifth bearing cover 3430 attached to the front surface of the cover 3422 and decorated on the front surface.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is attached to the front surface of the back back left base cover 3422 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3426, and the rotation shafts are the back back left base 3420 and the back back left base cover 3422. A rear rear left drive motor 3431 projecting between the rear rear left drive motor 3431, a spur gear-like drive gear 3432 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear left drive motor 3431, and a rear rear left base 3420 that meshes with the drive gear 3432. A spur gear-like relay gear 3433 rotatably attached to the relay gear 3433, a drive rack gear 3434a extending vertically and meshing with the relay gear 3433, a lower working rack gear 3434b extending vertically above the drive rack gear 3434a, and The working rack gear has an upper working rack gear 3434c extending vertically above the working rack gear lower 3434b. 3434b and actuating the rack gear on the 3434c is provided with a back left rear drive rack 3434 mounted slidably up and down by the back left rear base cover 3422 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back left rear base cover 3422.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has a driven gear portion 3435a meshing with the lower working rack gear 3434b of the back rear left drive rack 3434, and a cylindrical body portion 3435b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3435a. And a transmission gear member having a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3435c formed at the front end of the body portion 3435b and rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the back rear left base cover 3422. A lower gear 3435, a driven gear portion 3436a meshing with the upper working rack gear 3434c of the rear left drive rack 3434, a cylindrical barrel portion 3436b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3436a, and a front end of the barrel portion 3436b. The rear rear left base cover 3422 has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3436c. An upper transmission gear member 3436 that is rotatably mounted around a rearward extending shaft, an upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A, and an upper shaft portion of the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C. The rotating gear 3437 is a bevel gear-shaped rotating gear 3437 which is attached to the rotating gear 3412 so as to be integrally rotatable, and is engaged with the transmitting gear portion 3435c of the lower transmitting gear member 3435 and the transmitting gear portion 3436c of the upper transmitting gear member 3436, respectively. It is equipped with.

  Furthermore, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has a gear portion 3438a extending in an arc shape meshing with the drive gear 3432, and a detection piece 3438b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3438a. A detection gear member 3438 rotatably attached to the front surface of the back rear left base 3420 and a back rear left rotation attached to the front surface of the back rear left base 3420 so as to detect the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438. A detection sensor 3439.

  Further, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 includes a shaft part 3412 on the upper side of the first back back left rotated decorative body 3410A, a shaft part 3412 on the lower side of the second back back left rotated decorative body 3410B, and a third part. A rotation coupling mechanism 3450 that couples the upper shaft portion 3412 of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear rotation decoration body 3410D so as to transmit rotation is provided. . The rotary coupling mechanism 3450 includes two (a pair) of arm portions 3451 protruding from the tip of the shaft portion 3412 and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm portions 3451.

  The rotary connecting mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. The two arm portions 3451 protrude from the end portion of the shaft portion 3412 with the same clearance in the circumferential direction on the circumference separated from the center in the shaft portion 3412, and in the circumferential direction. Is formed narrower than the gap. The spider 3452 is connected to the four arm portions 3451 in a state where one arm portion 3451 of the other shaft portion 3412 is inserted into each gap between the two arm portions 3451 of the one shaft portion 3412. It has four cylindrical bar-shaped transmission portions 3451a that protrude from the enclosed inner side between the arm portions 3451.

  In the assembled state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has four back rear left rotated decorative bodies 3410 arranged in the vertical direction and the second back rear left rotated decorative body 3410B and the second rear decorative body 3410B in the assembled state. Each shaft part 3412 is arranged along an arc having a center on the right side of the horizontal line passing between the left and right three-sided back decorative body 3410C. In addition, each of the shaft portions 3412 of the four back and rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, each shaft portion 3412 is arranged on the same plane parallel to the surface of the game area 5a. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 are attached so as not to move in the direction in which the shaft portion 3412 extends.

  Further, in a state where it is assembled to the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, the transmission gear portion 3435c of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member upper 3436 respectively connect the bearing base lower 3423 and the bearing base upper 3425. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. In front of the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3436c of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear member upper 3436, the shaft portions 3412 of the two adjacent rear back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 are connected to the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Respectively.

  Furthermore, in the state assembled in the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, the front side of the back back left drive motor 3431 is covered with the first bearing cover 3426, and the two rotary coupling mechanisms 3450 are connected to the second bearing cover 3427 and the second bearing cover 3427. The four-bearing covers 3429 are respectively covered to improve the appearance of the left movable rendering unit 3400 behind the back.

  Next, the operation of the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. In the normal state, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 of the back back left movable effect unit 3400 has the four back back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 forward (front) the first decorative portion 3411a of the decorative body main body 3411. It is in the state of being directed (the state of the first performance position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186 (a), the rear left drive rack 3434 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3433 is engaged in the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3434a of the rear left drive rack 3434, and the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the upper end of the operation rack gear lower 3434b and the upper portion of the operation rack gear 3434c The driven gear portions 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436 are engaged with each other. The back left rotation detection sensor 3439 detects the detection piece 3438b of the detection gear member 3438.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3433 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back left drive motor 3431 via the drive gear 3432, the back of the back is driven by the drive rack gear 3434a meshing with the relay gear 3433. The left drive rack 3434 will slide upward. When the rear left drive rack 3434 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3435a of the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the driven gear portion 3436a of the transmission gear member upper 3436 meshing with the lower working rack gear 3434b and the upper working rack gear 3434c, respectively. The lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed.

  When the lower transmission gear member 3435 and the upper transmission gear member 3436 rotate in the counterclockwise direction, the respective transmission gear portions 3435c and the respective transmission gear portions 3436c meshed with the respective transmission gear portions 3436c are counterclockwise in a bottom view. It will rotate in the surrounding direction. As a result, the first back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410C are moved forward through the shaft part 3412 to which the rotation gear 3437 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decoration part 3411b is moved forward. It will rotate about each shaft part 3412 so that it may move.

  The upper shaft portion 3412 of the first back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the second back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410B so as to be able to transmit the rotation by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450. Since the upper shaft portion 3412 of the third back rear left decorative body 3410C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3412 of the fourth back rear left decorative body 3410D by the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 so as to be able to transmit the rotation. The first back back left rotating decorative body 3410A and the third back back left rotating decorative body 3410C are rotated by the second back back left rotating decorative body 3410B and the fourth back back left rotating body 3410C via the respective rotation coupling mechanisms 3450. The second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D are transmitted to the decoration body 3410D, and the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft part 3412 on the first back rear left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3437, the tip thereof The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is in contact with the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is further connected to the tip of the shaft portion 3412 on the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back left rotation decoration body 3410D side. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3412 on the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back left rotation decoration body 3410D side is rotated.

  At this time, the shaft part 3412 on the first back back left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back back left rotation decoration body 3410C side, the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back left rotation decoration body 3410D side. Since the shaft portions 3412 of the cross-shaped spider 3452 extend in different directions, the surfaces passing through the centers of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 are the central axes of the two shaft portions 3412 of different extending directions. The four transmission parts 3451a slide relative to each other in the direction in which the arm part 3451 extends so as to keep the same state on the plane including the bisector of the corner of It becomes. Thereby, the rotation of the shaft part 3412 on the first back back left rotation decoration body 3410A and the third back back left rotation decoration body 3410C side is smoothly transmitted, and the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back decoration body 3410C. The shaft part 3412 on the left rotation decorative body 3410D side can be rotated.

  In this manner, the first back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410A, the second back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410B, and the third back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410C and the first back-rear rotation decoration body 3410C can be transmitted by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 capable of transmitting the rotation. Since the four back left rotating decorative bodies 3410D are connected to each other, the four back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 can be simultaneously rotated at the same speed in the same direction by driving the back rear left driving motor 3431.

  When the relay gear 3433 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back rear left drive motor 3431 in order to slide the back rear left drive rack 3434 upward, the gear portion 3438a engaged with the drive gear 3432 is moved. Accordingly, the detection gear member 3438 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  Then, when the detection gear member 3438 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and the detection piece 3438b is not detected by the back rear left rotation detection sensor 3439, the driving of the back rear left drive motor 3431 is stopped. And the four back left rotation decorative bodies 3410 stop in a state where the respective second decorative portions 3411b are directed forward (front) (the state of the second effect position rotated about 62 degrees from the normal state). (See FIG. 186 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3411b simulating a spotlight lens is facing forward, the four round decorations are arranged side by side, and the decoration different from the normal state is provided. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the back back left drive rack 3434 is slid to the upper moving end via the drive gear 3432 and the relay gear 3433 by the back back left drive motor 3431, the four back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 are respectively connected to the normal back. With respect to the state, a state where the shaft portion 3412 is rotated (inverted) about 180 degrees (the state of the third effect position) is obtained (see FIG. 186 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3411c with the decoration of characters is in a state of facing forward (front), and it is possible to make the player suggest the arrival of a chance by a phrase formed by the decoration of four characters. At the same time, a decoration different from the normal state can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  In addition, when returning the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 to a normal state, it can be returned to a normal state by rotating the back back left drive motor 3431 in the reverse direction.

  Thus, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 has its respective shafts within the angle range of about 180 degrees that reverses the four back back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 from the normal state by the back back left drive motor 3431. It can be rotated in the same direction around the part 3412 at the same time. Thereby, the decoration which faces the front can be changed (changed) variously. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back left decorative board 3421, the four back back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 can be independently decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-2. Rear back right movable decorative unit]
The back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the back back right movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 184, 187, and 188. FIG. 187 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable member of the back-back right movable decoration body unit in the back-back right-movable rendering unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the member which a unit moves from a right side surface. FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right rotating decorative body in the back-back right movable decorative body unit of the back-back right movable effect unit.

  The back back right movable decoration unit 3501 of the back back right movable effect unit 3500 includes a plurality (four in this case) of back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 provided with a predetermined decoration as shown in the figure. The plurality of back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are, from below, the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C, and the fourth back rear. A right rotation decorative body 3510D is provided. Each of these back and right rotating decorative bodies 3510 is formed in substantially the same shape.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3510 swells in a semi-cylindrical shape and extends in a disk shape obliquely from the end of the first decorative portion 3511a and the first decorative portion 3511a simulating the body portion of the spotlight. A decorative body body 3511 having a second decorative portion 3511b simulating the lens portion, and a third decorative portion 3511c extending in a flat shape on the opposite side of the first decorative portion 3511a and provided with predetermined characters, The decorative body main body 3511 includes a shaft portion 3512 protruding from two side surfaces intersecting with the end portion of the second decorative portion 3511b.

  The decorative body main body 3511 of the back right rotation decorative body 3510 is formed of a transparent member, and is partially decorated with a metallic luster. The decorative body main body 3511 is formed so that the second decorative portion 3511b can be visually recognized when the first decorative portion 3511a faces the front. Although not shown in the figure, the third decorative portion 3511c of the decorative body main body 3511 is decorated with one character, which becomes one word, by the four back and right rotating decorative bodies 3510.

  The four back-right rotation decorative bodies 3510 have respective shaft portions 3512 having a predetermined radius so that each second decorative portion 3511b faces the center side with each first decorative portion 3511a facing the front. Arranged along an arc.

  The back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is attached to a flat rear back right base 3520 extending in an arc shape with a predetermined width and a front side of the back rear right base 3520, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front. A back back right decorative substrate 3521 and a transparent back back right base cover 3522 attached to the back back right base 3520 so as to cover the front side of the back back right decorative substrate 3521.

  The back rear right base 3520 is slidably inserted into the slide mounting portion 3520a that is slidably mounted on the upper portion by the slide shaft 3562 of the back rear right slide unit 3560, and the slide guide 3563 of the back rear right slide unit 3560 at the lower portion. A cylindrical slide pin 3520b to be formed, and a pair of elongated slits 3520c that are formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, penetrate the front and rear, and extend vertically. , And a detection piece 3520d that protrudes upward from the upper part and is detected by the slide detection sensor 3574 of the rear right slide unit 3560. The slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 in the back rear right slide unit 3560 are slidably inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c in the back rear right base 3520, respectively.

  The back back right decorative board 3521 is mounted so that four LEDs correspond to one back back right rotation decoration body 3510, and these four LEDs attach the shaft portion 3512 of the back back right rotation decoration body 3510. In between, there are two each. In other words, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative board 3521 are respectively arranged on the inner side and the outer side of the arc in which the four back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged. The LED on the back rear right decorative board 3521 is a full color LED.

  Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has a rear side of the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotated decorative body 3510A and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotated decorative body 3510B. A bearing base lower 3523 that is rotatably supported and attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522, an upper shaft portion 3512 of the second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B, and a third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C. A bearing base 3524 that rotatably supports the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3512 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522, and an upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decorative body 3510C. And an upper bearing stand 3525 that rotatably supports the rear side of the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right decorative body 3510D and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522. There.

  Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 rotatably supports the lower shaft portion 3512 of the first back back right rotating decorative body 3510A and is attached to the front of the back back right base cover 3522 and is attached to the front. The front side of each of the first bearing cover 3526 to which the decoration is applied, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A, and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B. , And a second bearing cover 3527 that is attached to the front surface of the bearing base lower 3523 and is decorated on the front surface, a shaft portion 3512 on the upper side of the second back-right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the first A third shaft that rotatably supports the front side of the lower shaft portion 3512 of the three-side rear right rotation decorative body 3510C and is attached to the front surface of the bearing stand 3524 and is decorated on the front surface. The front side of the cover 3528 and the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotating decorative body 3510D are rotatably supported and a bearing base. A fourth bearing cover 3529 attached to the front surface of the upper 3525 and decorated on the front surface, and an upper shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D are rotatably supported and the back rear right base A fifth bearing cover 3530 attached to the front surface of the cover 3522 and decorated on the front surface.

  Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the front surface of the back back right base cover 3522 on the rear side of the first bearing cover 3526, and the rotation axis is the back back right base 3520 and the back back right base cover 3522. A rear rear right drive motor 3531 protruding between the rear rear right drive motor 3531, a spur gear-like drive gear 3532 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear right drive motor 3531, and a rear rear right base 3520 meshing with the drive gear 3532. A spur gear-like relay gear 3533 rotatably attached to the upper side, a drive rack gear 3534a vertically engaged with the relay gear 3533, an operation rack gear lower 3534b extending vertically above the drive rack gear 3534a, and The working rack gear has an upper working rack gear 3534c extending vertically above the working rack gear lower 3534b. 3534b and actuating the rack gear on the 3534c is provided with a back right rear drive rack 3534 mounted slidably up and down by the back right after the base cover 3522 so as to be positioned on the front side of the back right after the base cover 3522.

  The back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 includes a driven gear portion 3535a meshing with the lower working rack gear 3534b of the back rear right drive rack 3534, and a columnar body portion 3535b protruding forward from the driven gear portion 3535a. And a transmission gear member which has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3535c formed at the front end of the body portion 3535b and is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the back rear right base cover 3522. A lower gear 3535, a driven gear portion 3536a meshing with an operating rack gear upper 3534c of the rear right drive rack 3534, a cylindrical barrel portion 3536b projecting forward from the driven gear portion 3536a, and a front end of the barrel portion 3536b. The rear rear right base cover 3522 has a bevel gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3536c. A transmission gear member upper 3536 that is rotatably mounted around a rearward extending shaft, an upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A, and an upper shaft portion of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C. 3512 and a transmission gear portion 3535c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and a transmission gear portion 3536c of the upper transmission gear member 3536 are respectively meshed with the rotation gear 3537. It is equipped with.

  Further, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 has an arcuately extending gear portion 3538a meshing with the drive gear 3532 and a detecting piece 3538b extending in a fan shape at a position different from the gear portion 3538a. A detection gear member 3538 rotatably attached to the front surface of the back rear right base 3520 and a back rear right rotation attached to the front surface of the back rear right base 3520 so as to detect the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538. A detection sensor 3539.

  Also, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 includes a shaft part 3512 on the upper side of the first back back right rotated decorative body 3510A, a shaft part 3512 on the lower side of the second back back right rotated decorative body 3510B, and a third part. A rotation coupling mechanism 3450 is provided for coupling the upper shaft portion 3512 of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C and the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D so as to be able to transmit rotation. . The rotational coupling mechanism 3450 has the same configuration as the rotational coupling mechanism 3450 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In the assembled state, the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 has four back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 arranged in the vertical direction in the front view and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B. Each shaft part 3512 is arranged along a horizontal line passing between the three back-right rotating decorative bodies 3510C and an arc having a center on the left side thereof. In addition, each of the shaft portions 3512 of the four back-right-rotating decorative bodies 3510 is arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, each shaft portion 3512 is disposed on the same plane parallel to the surface of the game area 5a. Further, in the assembled state, the four back rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 are attached so as not to move in the direction in which the shaft portion 3512 extends.

  Further, in a state where it is assembled to the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the transmission gear portion 3535c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the upper transmission gear member 3536 are respectively connected to the lower bearing stand 3523 and the upper bearing stand 3525. Each penetrates and is exposed forward. In front of the transmission gear portion 3535c and the transmission gear portion 3536c of the lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536, the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent rear right rotation decorative bodies 3510 are the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Respectively.

  Furthermore, in the state assembled in the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the front side of the back back right drive motor 3531 is covered with the first bearing cover 3526, and the two rotary coupling mechanisms 3450 are connected to the second bearing cover 3527 and the first back cover. The four-bearing covers 3529 are respectively covered to improve the appearance of the back right-right movable effect unit 3500.

  Next, the operation of the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188. In the normal state, the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 of the back back right movable effect unit 3500 has the four back back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 forward (front) the first decorative portion 3511a of the decorative body main body 3511. It is in the state of being directed (the state of the first performance position). In this state, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 (a), the rear rear right drive rack 3534 that slides up and down is located at the lower moving end. The relay gear 3533 is engaged in the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3534a of the rear right drive rack 3534, and the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the upper end of the operation rack gear lower 3534b and the upper operation rack gear 3534c. The driven gear portions 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 are engaged with each other. Further, the back right rotation detection sensor 3539 detects the detection piece 3538b of the detection gear member 3538.

  From this normal state, when the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back right drive motor 3531 via the drive gear 3532, the drive rack gear 3534 a meshed with the relay gear 3533 causes the back The rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward. When the rear right drive rack 3534 slides upward, the driven gear portion 3535a of the transmission gear member lower 3535 and the driven gear portion 3536a of the transmission gear member upper 3536 meshing with the lower operating rack gear 3534b and the upper operating rack gear 3534c, respectively. The lower transmission gear member 3535 and the upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction at the same speed.

  When these lower transmission gear member 3535 and upper transmission gear member 3536 rotate in the clockwise direction, the respective transmission gear portions 3535c and the respective transmission gear portions 3536c mesh with the respective transmission gear portions 3536c in the clockwise direction in the bottom view. Will rotate in the direction. As a result, the first back-right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back-right rotating decorative body 3510C are moved forward through the shaft portion 3512 to which the rotating gear 3537 is attached, and the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3511b is moved forward. It will rotate about each shaft part 3512 so as to move.

  Then, the upper shaft portion 3512 of the first back-right rotating decorative body 3510A is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the second back-right rotating decorative body 3510B by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be able to transmit the rotation. Since the upper shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C is connected to the lower shaft portion 3512 of the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be able to transmit rotation, The first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C are rotated by the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotating body via the respective rotation coupling mechanisms 3450. The second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back back right rotation decoration body 3510D are transmitted to the decoration body 3510D, and the first back back right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C. Flip substantially so that the simultaneously rotated in the direction.

  The rotation transmission by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 will be described in detail. When the shaft portion 3512 on the first back rear right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back rear right rotation decoration body 3510C side is rotated via the rotation gear 3537, the tip thereof The transmission portion 3452a of the spider 3452 is in contact with the side surface of the arm portion 3451, and the transmission portion 3452a is further connected to the tip of the shaft portion 3512 on the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D side. By contacting the side surface of the arm portion 3451, the shaft portion 3512 on the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body 3510D side is rotated.

  At this time, the shaft part 3512 on the side of the first back back right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C, the second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back back right rotation decoration body 3510D side. Since the extending directions of the shaft portions 3512 are different from each other, the planes passing through the centers of the four transmission portions 3452a of the cross-shaped spider 3452 are the central axes of the two shaft portions 3512 having different extending directions. The four transmission parts 3451a slide relative to each other in the direction in which the arm part 3451 extends so as to keep the same state on the plane including the bisector of the corner of It becomes. As a result, the rotation of the shaft part 3512 on the first back back right rotation decoration body 3510A and the third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C is smoothly transmitted to the second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back back decoration body. The shaft portion 3512 on the right rotation decorative body 3510D side can be rotated.

  In this way, the first back-rear-right rotating decorative body 3510A, the second back-rear-right rotating decorative body 3510B, and the third back-rear-right rotating decorative body 3510C and the first back-rear-rotating decorative body 3510B, and the third back-rear-rotating decorative body 3510C. Since the four back-right rotation decoration bodies 3510D are connected to each other, the four back-right rotation decoration bodies 3510 can be simultaneously rotated in the same direction at the same speed by driving the back-right right drive motor 3531.

  When the relay gear 3533 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back rear right drive motor 3531 in order to slide the back rear right drive rack 3534 upward, a gear portion 3538a engaged with the drive gear 3532 is obtained. Thus, the detection gear member 3538 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the detection gear member 3538 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the detection piece 3538b is not detected by the back-right rotation detection sensor 3539, the drive of the back-right drive motor 3531 is stopped. Then, the four back-right rotation decorative bodies 3510 stop in a state where the respective second decorative portions 3511b are directed forward (front) (the state of the second effect position rotated about 62 degrees from the normal state). (Refer to FIG. 188 (b)). In this state, since the disk-shaped second decorative portion 3511b simulating a spotlight lens is facing forward, the four round decorations are arranged side by side, and the decoration different from the normal state is provided. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the back rear right drive rack 3534 is slid to the upper moving end via the drive gear 3532 and the relay gear 3533 by the back rear right drive motor 3531, the four back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are respectively connected to the normal back. With respect to the state, a state where the shaft portion 3512 is rotated (inverted) about 180 degrees (a state of the third effect position) is obtained (see FIG. 188 (c)). In this state, the third decorative portion 3511c with the decoration of the character is in a state of facing forward (front), and the player can suggest the arrival of a chance by a phrase formed by the decoration of the four characters. At the same time, a decoration different from the normal state can be shown to the player (see FIG. 189 (c)).

  In addition, when returning the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 to a normal state, it can be returned to a normal state by rotating the back back right drive motor 3531 in the reverse direction.

  In this way, the back right movable decorative body unit 3501 has the respective axes within the angle range of about 180 degrees where the four back back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are reversed from the normal state by the back back right drive motor 3531. It can be rotated in the same direction around the portion 3512 at the same time. Thereby, the decoration which faces the front can be changed (changed) variously. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back right decorative board 3521, the four back back right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are independently decorated with various colors and brightness. be able to.

[5-9f-3. Production by the back left movable decorative unit and the back right movable decorative unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, mainly for the movable effect using the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500. I will explain. FIG. 189 (a) shows the back back left rotating decoration body and the back back right rotating decoration body in the back back left movable decoration body unit and back back right movable decoration body unit of the back back left movable rendering unit and back back right movable rendering unit. It is a front view shown in the state of a normal first production position, (b) is a front view showing the back back left rotation decoration body and the back back right rotation decoration body in a state rotated to the second production position ( c) is a front view showing the back-rear left rotated decorative body and the back-rear right rotated decorative body rotated to the third effect position.

  The back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The main effect display device 1600 faces forward from between (see FIG. 135 and the like). As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are each provided with four back rear left rotational decorative bodies 3410 as shown in FIG. And the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 is in the state of the first production position with the first decoration portion 3411a and the first decoration portion 3511a facing forward. In this state, on the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right decorative board 3521, the four LEDs corresponding to the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are caused to emit light. The rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be illuminated and decorated with various colors.

  From this normal state, the back back left rotating motor 3431 and the back back right driving motor 3531 are used to move the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 in the direction in which the respective inner end portions are directed forward. When rotating about 62 degrees around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the disc-shaped second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b in the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved forward. It will be in the state of the 2nd production position which turned. In this state, it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the four round second decorative portions 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b are arranged on the circumference. When the LEDs inside the back back left decorative substrate 3421 and the back back right decorative substrate 3521 are caused to emit light in the state of the second production position, the disk-like shape in the back back left rotated decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotated decorative body 3510 is obtained. The second decoration portion 3411b and the second decoration portion 3511b can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be shown a light emission effect in which light is emitted from the spotlight.

  From the state of the second production position, the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are respectively directed to the front by the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531. The portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b are approximately 118 around the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 in the direction facing the outside of the arc in which the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are arranged. Is rotated by 180 degrees (rotated 180 degrees from the state of the first effect position), the third decorative portion 3511c on which characters are decorated in the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 faces forward. It will be in the state of the 3rd production position. In this state, the words and phrases formed by the decoration of each of the four characters can be shown to the player, and the player can be made to suggest the arrival of the chance by the words and phrases. Further, in the state of the third effect position, four LEDs corresponding to the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 on the back back left decoration board 3421 and the back back right decoration board 3521 are displayed. By emitting light, the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be light emission decorated in various colors.

  In the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back rear left rotated decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotated decorative body 3510 can be rotated separately, respectively. By appropriately combining the rotation and luminous decoration, various effects can be shown to the player.

  Thus, according to the back back left movable decoration body unit 3401 and back back right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back back right movable effect unit 3500, the adjacent back back left rotation decorations. The shaft part 3412 and the shaft parts 3512 of the body 3410 and the back right rotation decorative body 3510 extend in different directions, and a plurality of backs in which the shaft parts 3412 and the shaft parts 3512 are arranged on the same plane. The rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are provided, and the shaft part 3412 and the shaft parts 3512 of the adjacent back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are connected to each other from a universal shaft joint. Since the rotation connection mechanism 3450 is connected so as to be able to transmit rotation, the first back back left rotation decorative body 3410 is driven by the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531. When the shaft part 3412 and the shaft part 3512 of the third back back left rotation decoration body 3510A, the first back back right rotation decoration body 3510A, and the third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C are rotated, the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 is used. The shaft part 3412 and the shaft part 3512 of the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the fourth back back right rotation decoration body 3510D and the second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back back right rotation decoration body 3510D. The rotation is transmitted, and the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated simultaneously.

  Accordingly, the number of back rear left drive motors 3431 and back back right drive motors 3531 for the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 can be reduced as much as possible. The space required for the left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be reduced as much as possible, and the space required for the plurality of back back left rotation decorations 3410 and the back back right rotation decorations 3510 can be relative. Can be wide. Accordingly, the space for the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be widened, so that the rotation range of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be increased. To make the movement more enjoyable, to make the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotating decoration body 3510 larger and stand out, or to make the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and back back right rotation decoration. Since it is possible to increase the impact when the number of bodies 3510 is increased and rotated, the effects of the movement and decoration of the plurality of back rear left rotated decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotated decorative bodies 3510 are further enhanced. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the first back back left rotating decorative body 3410A, the third back back left rotating decorative body 3410C, the first back back right rotating decorative body 3510A, and the third back back right rotating decorative body 3510C are connected to the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back. When rotated by the rear right drive motor 3531, a plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 in which the shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 extend in different directions via the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 are provided. Since it can be rotated at the same time, it is possible to show the player a movement with a sense of unity (movable effect) while the movements of the plurality of back-back left rotation decorations 3410 and back-back right rotation decorations 3510 are disturbed. In addition, it is possible to further enhance the production effect by the plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and the back-rear rotation rotation decorations 3510. At this time, since the shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged on the same plane, The back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be easily recognized as belonging to the same group, and a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies can be recognized. Even if 3510 rotates at the same time, it does not give a sense of incongruity to the player, and the movements (movable effects) of a plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear rotation decorations 3510 that rotate at the same time are enjoyed. Decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  Further, two (a pair of) arm portions 3451 are protruded from the shaft portions 3412 and the tips of the shaft portions 3512 of the two adjacent back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510. Since the number of the arm portions 3451 is minimized, the gaps in the circumferential direction between the arm portions 3451 can be made as wide as possible without increasing the outer diameter of the arm portions 3451. The transmission part 3352a of the spider 3453 can be made thick enough. Therefore, by making the transmission part 3452a of the spider 3453 as thick as possible, damage to the spider 3452 can be reduced, so that the game is interrupted due to breakage during the game, and the player is uncomfortable. Can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 (universal shaft joint) can be prevented from increasing in size, the space for the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 is relatively set. Therefore, the rotation range of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be increased to make the movement more enjoyable, or the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and back It is possible to make the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 larger and stand out, or to increase the impact when rotated by increasing the number of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510. The effects of the movement and decoration of the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-rear rotation rotation decoration body 3510 can be further enhanced. It can be suppressed lower.

  Furthermore, since the rotation is transmitted via the spider 3452, the time lag of the rotation transmission due to the expansion and contraction (spring constant) of the rubber and the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted using the rubber and the spring. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear rotation decorations 3510 can be rotated simultaneously. Accordingly, when the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate in order in a delayed manner, which makes the player feel unnatural. To prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the lowering of interest by delighting the movement of a plurality of back-rear left rotation ornaments 3410 and back-rear right rotation ornaments 3510 with a sense of unity. be able to.

  In addition, the transmission part 3452a of the spider 3452 is connected to the first back back left rotation decoration body 3410A, the third back back left rotation decoration body 3410C, the first back back right rotation decoration body 3510A, and the third back back right rotation decoration body 3510C. Side surfaces of the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the fourth back rear right A universal shaft coupling (rotation coupling mechanism 3450) that transmits rotation between two shaft portions 3412 and 3512 by simply sandwiching between the shaft portion 3412 of the rotating decorative body 3510D and the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3512. Compared to the case where universal universal joints or constant velocity shaft joints are used as universal shaft joints, the number of parts can be reduced and assembly can be performed. Cal effort to be able to or facilitate an increase in costs for the gaming machine can be suppressed.

[5-9f-4. Left rear slide unit]
Next, the back rear left slide unit 3460 in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. FIG. 190A is a perspective view of the back rear left slide unit and the back back right slide unit in the back back left movable effect unit and the back back right movable effect unit, and FIG. 190B is a back back left movable effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back left slide unit and back back right slide unit in a unit and back back right movable production | presentation unit from the back. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 is a rear rear left slide unit and the rear back right slide unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating the movement of the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit by the back rear left slide unit and the back rear right slide unit in the back rear left movable effect unit and the back rear right movable effect unit. FIG.

  The back back left slide unit 3460 of the back back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the turning table 3380 in the back back center movable effect unit 3350. It is moved (slid) in a straight line between a separation position that is far from the center) and an approaching position that is close. As shown in the figure, the back rear left slide unit 3460 has a frame-like back rear left unit base 3461 attached to the turntable 3380, and left and right ends on the front upper part of the back rear left unit base 3461. And a box-shaped slide guide 3463 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the rear rear left unit base 3461 and that opens to the left and right.

  The rear rear left unit base 3461 of the rear rear left slide unit 3460 extends in a circular arc shape so that the left side extends from the vicinity of the upper part to the lower end along the outer periphery of the turning table 3380, and the upper part is linear to the right of the lower end. It is formed in a deformed C-shape that extends to A slide shaft 3462 is attached to an upper portion of the rear left unit base 3461 extending in a straight line. The back rear left unit base 3461 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the height of the leftmost side portion of the left side that is formed in an arc shape (the height of the center of the arc). A circular through-hole 3461a penetrating through. The base portions 3465a (gear portions 3465d) of a pair of slide arms 3465 described later are inserted through the two through holes 3461a arranged vertically.

  The slide shaft 3462 is slidably attached to the slide attachment portion 3420a of the back back left base 3420 in the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401. The slide guide 3463 is slidably inserted into the slide pin 3420b of the back back left base 3420 in the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  The back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the back rear left unit base 3461 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3461a. The arm mounting member 3464 having a pair of cylindrical mounting shafts 3464a and the pair of mounting shafts 3464a of the arm mounting member 3464 are rotatably mounted from the front, respectively, and are rotated to the back left by rotating. And a pair of slide arms 3465 for sliding the body unit 3401 between the separation position and the approach position.

  The slide arm 3465 includes a base portion 3465a that is rotatably attached to an attachment shaft 3464a of the arm attachment member 3464, and an arm portion 3465b that extends outwardly from the front end of the base portion 3465a along the front surface of the rear rear left unit base 3461. And a slide pin 3465c that protrudes forward from the tip of the arm portion 3465b into a cylindrical shape and is slidably inserted into a slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420 of the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, and a base portion A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3465d formed on the outer periphery of the 3465a. Of the pair of slide arms 3465, the lower slide arm 3465 includes a pulley portion 3465e around which the second belt 3471 is wound around the rear end of the base portion 3465a.

  The back rear left slide unit 3460 is attached below the slide guide 3463 at the lower front surface of the back back left unit base 3461, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the back back left unit base 3461. A rear rear left slide drive motor 3466, a spur gear-like drive gear 3467 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear left slide drive motor 3466, a spur gear-like driven gear portion 3468a meshing with the drive gear 3467, A driving pulley 3468 having a driven gear portion 3468a and a pulley portion 3468b that rotates integrally with the driven gear portion 3468a and rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461, and a driving pulley on the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461 3468 and the lower slide arm 3465 are rotatably mounted at an intermediate position. An endless annular first belt 3470 that is wound around a relay pulley 3469 having two pulley portions 3469a arranged in parallel, a pulley portion 3468b of a drive pulley 3468, and a pulley portion 3469a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3469. An endless annular second belt 3471 wound around a pulley portion 3469a on the front side of the relay pulley 3469 and a pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465.

  The relay pulley 3469 is rotatably attached to the back rear left unit base 3461 at a position away from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 and the drive pulley 3468 to the left in front view. Accordingly, the first belt 3470 wound around the drive pulley 3468 and the relay pulley 3469 and the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the pulley portion 3465e of the slide arm 3465 are different from each other. The rotation transmission path by the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 is bent in a letter shape with the relay pulley 3469 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3470 and the second belt 3471 are accommodated in the rear back left unit base 3461 formed in a deformed C shape so that they cannot be seen from the front side.

  Further, the back rear left slide unit 3460 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461 and is engaged with the gear portion 3465d of the lower slide arm 3465 and is a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear. 3472 and the second transmission gear 3473 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3472 and meshes with the gear portion 3465d of the upper slide arm 3465 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear left unit base 3461. And a slide detection sensor 3474 that is attached to the upper front part of the back rear left unit base 3461 and detects the slide position of the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401. The first transmission gear 3472 and the second transmission gear 3473 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back back left base 3420 in the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  Next, the slide (movement) of the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 by the back back left slide unit 3460 will be described in detail. The back back left slide unit 3460 in the back back left movable effect unit 3400 is inserted into the slide shaft 3462 after inserting the slide pin 3420b of the back back left base 3420 in the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 into the slide guide 3463. Attach the slide mounting portion 3420a of the rear back left base 3420. At this time, the slide pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 arranged vertically are inserted into slide slits 3420c arranged vertically on the back rear left base 3420, respectively. Accordingly, the back rear left slide unit 3460 can move the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the left-right direction by the slide shaft 3462 and the slide guide 3463 without swinging in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the rear rear left slide unit 3460 is in a state in which a pair of slide arms 3465 extend horizontally from the base portion 3465a to the left and the arm portion 3465b. . In this state, the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 is closest to the arcuate left side surface of the back rear left unit base 3461. That is, the slide pin 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 is in a state farthest from the center (turning center) of the arc that forms the left side surface.

  Since the slide pins 3465c of the pair of slide arms 3465 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3420c of the back rear left base 3420, in the normal state, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 is It is in the state of the separation position farthest from the turning center. In this normal state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is located in front of the back back left unit base 3461. In a normal state, the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back back left base 3420 in the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401.

  When the drive gear 3467 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back left slide drive motor 3466 from this normal state, the drive pulley 3468 is counterclockwise rotated by the driven gear portion 3468a engaged with the drive gear 3467. Will rotate in the direction. Then, when the driving pulley 3468 rotates counterclockwise, the relay pulley 3469 rotates counterclockwise via the first belt 3470 wound around the pulley portion 3468b of the driving pulley 3468, Further, the pulley portion 3465e of the lower slide arm 3465 is rotated counterclockwise via the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469, and the lower slide arm 3465 has its own base portion. It will rotate counterclockwise around the axis of 3465a.

  When the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3472 engaged with the gear portion 3465d of the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second transmission gear 3473 engaged with the gear 3472 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper slide arm 3465 is engaged via the gear portion 3465d of the upper slide arm 3465 engaged with the second transmission gear 3473. Will rotate in the clockwise direction about the axis of its own base 3465a. Accordingly, the lower slide arm 3465 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3465 rotates in the clockwise direction at the same time in opposite directions.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate in directions opposite to each other, the respective slide pins 3465c revolve at a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm portion 3465b) around the axis of the base portion 3465a. The position of each sliding pin 3465c in the left-right direction moves to the right. As the slide pin 3465c of the slide arm 3465 revolves, the slide pin 3465c slides in the slide slit 3420c of the back back left base 3420 and presses the back back left base 3420 to the right via the slide slit 3420c. Then, the entire rear movable left decorative unit 3401 moves (slides) to the right. Then, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 moves to the right until the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state.

  When the pair of slide arms 3465 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state, the driving of the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 stops, and the back right left movable decorative body unit 3401 stops moving to the right. In this state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is located farthest rightward from the arc-shaped left side surface of the back back left unit base 3461 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is in a position (approach position) that is closest to the center of the arc on the left side of the back back left unit base 3461 (the center of the turning table 3380). In this approach position state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is positioned inside the back back left unit base 3461 formed in a deformed C shape. In the approach position state, the slide detection sensor 3474 is in a non-detection state.

  When the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 in the approach position is moved to the separation position, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is driven by driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 in the opposite direction. Can be moved to the left from the approach position. Thereafter, when the slide detection sensor 3474 detects the detection piece 3420d of the back back left base 3420, the back back left slide drive motor 3466 is stopped to move the back back left. The decorative body unit 3401 can be returned to the separation position.

  Further, in a state where the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is moved to the separation position or the approach position, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 moves the slide pins 3465c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3465 toward each other. The respective slide arms 3465 are rotated so that the respective slide pins 3465c are brought into contact with the close ends of the slide slit 3420c of the back rear left base 3420. As a result, the rightward movement at the separation position and the leftward movement at the approach position are restricted (locked), and the rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 cannot be slid at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked to.

  In this way, by driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 can be moved between the separation position and the approach position, and can be stopped at any position therebetween. Can do.

  In addition, the rear rear left base 3420 is inserted into a pair of slide slits 3420 c formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the vertical center of the rear rear left base 3420. The base 3420 (back and rear left movable decorative body unit 3401) is moved between the separation position and the approach position. That is, when the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 (back back left movable decoration body unit 3401) is moved between the approach position and the separation position via the back back left base 3420, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3465 is performed. Since the moving pin 3465c applies a force to the central portion in the longitudinal direction (perpendicular to the moving direction) of the back rear left base 3420 to move the back back left base 3420, the rotation of the swivel table 3380 Even if the back rear left base 3420 is moved with the direction of the back rear left base 3420 changed, the force for moving the back back left base 3420 is not sufficient. By acting near the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3401), the back rear left base 3420 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back back left base 342 It can be moved smoothly. Accordingly, the rear back left base 3420 (back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401) can be smoothly and rearwardly moved without being rattled in any orientation due to the rotation of the turning table 3380. Since the back left rotation decoration body 3410 can be moved between the approach position and the separation position together, the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 can be moved without giving the player a sense of incongruity, It is possible to entertain the movement of the back rotated left decorative body 3410.

  In addition, the shape of the slide arm 3465 for moving the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 is extended from the base 3465a to the sliding pin 3465c in the form of a bar only in one direction from the base 3465a to the slide pin 3465c. Because of the shape, the slide arm 3465 can be made as small as possible, the slide arm 3465 can be made inconspicuous, and the slide arm 3401 can be moved when the back left movable decorative body unit 3401 is moved to the separation position. A part of 3465 can be prevented from protruding unnecessarily from the back rear left unit base 3461 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3465 is inward from the back rear left unit base 3461. By projecting, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is blocked and the effect image is viewed. Appearance of Ku becomes or the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

[5-9f-5. Rear back right slide unit]
Next, the back rear right slide unit 3560 in the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 193. The back back right slide unit 3560 of the back back right movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the turning table 3380 in the back back center movable effect unit 3350. It is moved (slid) in a straight line between a separation position that is far from the center) and an approaching position that is close. As shown in the figure, the back rear right slide unit 3560 has a frame-like back rear right unit base 3561 attached to the turning table 3380, and both right and left ends are attached to the front upper part of the back rear right unit base 3561. And a box-shaped slide guide 3563 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the rear right unit base 3561 and that extends to the left and right.

  The back rear right unit base 3561 of the back rear right slide unit 3560 extends in a circular arc shape so that the right side surface is along the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 from the vicinity of the upper portion to the lower end, and the upper portion is linear to the left of the lower end. It is formed in the shape of an odd-shaped character that extends. A slide shaft 3562 is attached to an upper portion of the back rear right unit base 3561 extending linearly. The back rear right unit base 3561 is formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the height of the portion of the right side surface that is formed in an arc shape that protrudes rightward (the height of the center of the arc). A circular through-hole 3561a penetrating through. The two base holes 3565a (gear portions 3565d) of a pair of slide arms 3565 to be described later are inserted into the two through holes 3561a arranged vertically.

  The slide shaft 3562 is slidably attached to the slide attachment portion 3520a of the back back right base 3520 in the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501. The slide guide 3563 is slidably inserted into the slide pin 3520b of the back back right base 3520 in the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  Further, the back rear right slide unit 3560 is attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561 and projects forward from the front surface of the back rear right unit base 3561 at a position coaxial with the two through holes 3561a. The arm mounting member 3564 having a pair of cylindrical mounting shafts 3564a and the pair of mounting shafts 3564a of the arm mounting member 3564 are rotatably mounted from the front, and the back and right movable decorations by rotating. And a pair of slide arms 3565 for sliding the body unit 3501 between the separation position and the approach position.

  The slide arm 3565 includes a base portion 3565a that is rotatably attached to an attachment shaft 3564a of the arm attachment member 3564, and an arm portion 3565b that extends outward from the front end of the base portion 3565a so as to follow the front surface of the rear rear right unit base 3561. A sliding pin 3565c that protrudes forward from the tip of the arm portion 3565b into a cylindrical shape and is slidably inserted into a sliding slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 in the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501; And a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3565d formed on the outer periphery of 3565a. Of the pair of slide arms 3565, the lower slide arm 3565 includes a pulley portion 3565e around which the second belt 3571 is wound around the rear end of the base portion 3565a.

  The back rear right slide unit 3560 is attached below the slide guide 3563 at the lower front surface of the back rear right unit base 3561, and the rotating shaft projects rearward through the back rear right unit base 3561. A rear rear right slide drive motor 3566, a spur gear-like drive gear 3567 attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear right slide drive motor 3566, a spur gear-like driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567, A driving pulley 3568 having a driven gear portion 3568a and a pulley portion 3568b that rotates integrally therewith, and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561, and a driving pulley on the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561 3568 and the lower slide arm 3565 are rotatably mounted at the middle position An endless annular first belt 3570 wound around a relay pulley 3569 having two pulley portions 3569a arranged in parallel, a pulley portion 3568b of a drive pulley 3568, and a pulley portion 3569a on the rear side of the relay pulley 3569. And an endless annular second belt 3571 wound around a pulley portion 3569a on the front side of the relay pulley 3569 and a pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565.

  The relay pulley 3569 is rotatably attached to the back rear right unit base 3561 at a position away from the straight line connecting the pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 and the drive pulley 3568 to the right in front view. Therefore, the first belt 3570 wound around the drive pulley 3568 and the relay pulley 3569 and the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3565e of the slide arm 3565 are different from each other. The rotation transmission path by the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 is bent in a letter shape with the relay pulley 3569 as a boundary. As a result, the first belt 3570 and the second belt 3571 are accommodated in the back rear right unit base 3561 formed in the shape of a modified letter so that they cannot be seen from the front side.

  Further, the back rear right slide unit 3560 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561 and is engaged with the gear portion 3565d of the lower slide arm 3565 and is a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear. 3572 and a second transmission gear 3573 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3572 and meshes with the gear portion 3565d of the upper slide arm 3565 and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back rear right unit base 3561. And a slide detection sensor 3574 that is attached to the upper front portion of the back rear right unit base 3561 and detects the slide position of the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501. The first transmission gear 3572 and the second transmission gear 3573 have the same size. The slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back back right base 3520 in the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  Next, the slide (movement) of the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 by the back back right slide unit 3560 will be described in detail. The back back right slide unit 3560 in the back back right movable effect unit 3500 is inserted into the slide shaft 3562 after the slide pin 3520b of the back back right base 3520 in the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 is inserted into the slide guide 3563. Attach the slide mounting portion 3520a of the rear right base 3520. At this time, the slide pins 3565c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 arranged above and below are inserted into slide slits 3520c arranged above and below the back rear right base 3520, respectively. Accordingly, the back rear right slide unit 3560 can move the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 in the left-right direction by the slide shaft 3562 and the slide guide 3563 without swinging in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the rear rear right slide unit 3560 has a pair of slide arms 3565 in a state where the arm portion 3565b extends horizontally from the base portion 3565a to the right. . In this state, the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 is in a state closest to the arc-shaped right side surface of the back rear right unit base 3561. That is, the sliding pin 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 is in a state farthest from the center of the arc (swivel center) forming the right side surface.

  Since the respective sliding pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c of the back rear right base 3520, in the normal state, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is It is in the state of the farthest distance from the turning center. In this normal state, the back rear right movable decorative unit 3501 is located directly in front of the back back right unit base 3561. In a normal state, the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back back right base 3520 in the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501.

  When the drive gear 3567 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back right slide drive motor 3566 from this normal state, the drive pulley 3568 is rotated clockwise by the driven gear portion 3568a meshing with the drive gear 3567. Will rotate in the direction. Then, when the driving pulley 3568 rotates in the clockwise direction, the relay pulley 3569 rotates in the clockwise direction via the first belt 3570 wound around the pulley portion 3568b of the driving pulley 3568, and further, The pulley portion 3565e of the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction via the second belt 3571 wound around the relay pulley 3569, so that the lower slide arm 3565 has the axis of its own base 3565a. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the core.

  When the lower slide arm 3565 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the first transmission gear 3572 meshing with the gear portion 3565d of the lower slide arm 3565 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and this first transmission is performed. The second transmission gear 3573 meshing with the gear 3572 rotates clockwise, and the upper slide arm 3565 is engaged via the gear portion 3565d of the upper slide arm 3565 meshing with the second transmission gear 3573. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the axis of its own base 3565a. Therefore, the lower slide arm 3565 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the upper slide arm 3565 rotates in the counterclockwise direction at the same time in opposite directions.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate in directions opposite to each other, the respective slide pins 3565c revolve with a predetermined radius (the radius of the length of the arm portion 3565b) around the axis of the base portion 3565a. The position of each sliding pin 3565c in the left-right direction moves to the left. As the slide pin 3565c of the slide arm 3565 revolves, the slide pin 3565c slides in the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 and presses the back rear right base 3520 to the left via the slide slit 3520c. Then, the entire rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves (slides) to the left. Then, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 moves to the left until the pair of slide arms 3565 are rotated 180 degrees from the normal state.

  When the pair of slide arms 3565 rotate 180 degrees from the normal state, the driving of the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped, and the back left right movable decorative body unit 3501 stops moving to the left. In this state, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is located farthest leftward from the arc-shaped right side surface of the back back right unit base 3561 (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is in a position (approach position) that is closest to the center of the arc on the right side of the back back right unit base 3561 (the center of the turning table 3380). In the state of this approach, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is located inside the back back right unit base 3561 formed in the shape of a modified letter. In the approach position state, the slide detection sensor 3574 is not detected.

  When the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 at the approach position is moved to the separation position, the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is driven by driving the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 in the opposite direction. Can be moved to the right from the approach position. After that, when the slide detection sensor 3574 detects the detection piece 3520d of the back back right base 3520, the back back right slide drive motor 3566 is stopped to move the back back right. The decorative body unit 3501 can be returned to the separation position.

  Further, in a state where the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 is moved to the separation position or the approach position, the slide pins 3565c at the tips of the pair of slide arms 3565 are moved closer to each other by the back rear right slide drive motor 3566. The respective slide arms 3565 are rotated so that the respective slide pins 3565c are brought into contact with the end portions of the slide slit 3520c of the back rear right base 3520 that are close to each other. As a result, the leftward movement at the separation position and the rightward movement at the approach position are restricted (locked), and the rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 cannot be slid at the separation position or the approach position. Can be locked to.

  As described above, by driving the back rear right slide drive motor 3566, the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be moved between the separation position and the approach position, and can be stopped at any position therebetween. Can do.

  In addition, the rear back right is supported by the slide pins 3565c of the pair of slide arms 3565 inserted into the pair of slide slits 3520c formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the vertical center of the back rear right base 3520. The base 3520 (back and rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) is moved between the separation position and the approach position. That is, when the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 (back back right movable decorative body unit 3501) is moved between the approach position and the separation position via the back back right base 3520, the sliding of the pair of slide arms 3565 is performed. Since the moving pin 3565c applies a force to the central portion in the longitudinal direction (perpendicular to the moving direction) of the back rear right base 3520 to move the back rear right base 3520, the rotation of the swivel table 3380 Even if the back rear right base 3520 is moved with the direction of the moving direction of the back back right base 3520 changed, the force for moving the back back right base 3520 is the force behind the back back right base 3520 (back back right By acting near the center of gravity of the movable decorative body unit 3501), the back rear right base 3520 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back rear right base 352. It can be moved smoothly. Accordingly, the rear back right base 3520 (back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) can be smoothly moved without being rattled regardless of the orientation of the rotating table 3380. Since the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved between the approach position and the separation position together, the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be moved without giving the player a sense of incongruity, It is possible to entertain the movement of the back rotated left decorative body 3410.

  Also, the shape of the slide arm 3565 for moving the back right-side movable decorative body unit 3501 is extended from the base 3565a to the sliding pin 3565c in a bar shape only in one direction from the base 3565a. Because of the shape, the slide arm 3565 can be made as small as possible, the slide arm 3565 can be made inconspicuous, and the slide arm A part of 3565 can be prevented from protruding unnecessarily from the back rear right unit base 3561 to the center side (inside) of the game area 5a, and a part of the slide arm 3565 is inward from the back rear right unit base 3561. By projecting, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is blocked and the effect image is viewed. Appearance of Ku becomes or the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated.

[5-9f-6. Production by back left slide unit and back right slide unit]
Next, a movable effect using the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back back right slide unit 3560 in the back back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back back right movable effect unit 3500 will be mainly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 (a) is a front view showing the back rear left movable decorative body unit and the back rear right movable decorative body unit in the back rear left movable rendering unit and the back rear right movable rendering unit in a normal separation position state. b) moves the back back left movable decoration unit and the back back right movable decoration body unit to the approach position by the back back left slide unit and back back right slide unit of the back back left movable production unit and back back right movable production unit. It is a front view shown in the state.

  The back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 are arranged symmetrically with respect to an axis extending vertically. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the back rear left movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right movable production unit 3500 are movable back and back by a back rear left slide unit 3460 and a back rear right slide unit 3560 in a normal state. The decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are in the separated positions.

  In a normal state, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are located at the separated positions by the back back left slide unit 3460 and the back back right slide unit 3560. The rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are in a state of being separated from each other, and the display of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side therebetween is provided. A square space with the screen facing forward is formed (see FIG. 135, etc.).

  In this normal state, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 are in a state where they overlap each other. And through the frame formed by the back rear left unit base 3461 and the back back right unit base 3561, the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side is displayed in a good state (player side). ) And the left and right sides of the main effect display device 1600 can be decorated with the back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back and right movable decorative body unit 3501 to improve the appearance.

  By driving the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back back right slide drive motor 3566 in the back back left slide unit 3460 and back back right slide unit 3560 from the normal state, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and back back right When the movable decorative body unit 3501 is moved from the separation position to the approach position, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are brought close to each other (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  In a state where the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved to the approach position, a plurality of back rear left rotated decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotated decorative bodies 3510 respectively provided. However, in the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, it is in a state of being lined up on the circumference of the same radius, and the player's interest is turned back and forth by blocking the effect image of the main effect display device 1600. It can be attracted to the body 3410 and the back right rotating decorative body 3510.

[5-9g. Backward upper movable production unit]
Next, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear upper movable production unit in the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front together with the turning table. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main structure and was seen from the back with the turning table in the back rear upper movable production | presentation unit in a unit.

  The rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the turning table 3380 in the rear rear central movable effect unit 3350 of the rear rear movable effect unit 3300. The rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is mounted on the front surface of the main body portion 3381 of the turntable 3380 so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 above the through-hole 3382. And a pair of spur gear-like slide gears 3620 that are rotatably mounted near the left and right ends of the rear surface of the slide plate 3610 and mesh with the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 of the turning table 3380, respectively. The slide frame 3630 has a pair of movable rack gears 3631 extending vertically and meshing with the slide gear 3620, and is attached to the front surface of the slide plate 3610 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. It is installed and the production image is displayed. A pair of back and rear upper slide drive units that are respectively mounted on the outside of the pair of fixed rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body portion 3381 of the swivel table 3380 and move the slide plate 3610 in the vertical direction. 3650.

  The slide plate 3610 is spaced apart from the left and right, penetrates forward and backward, extends vertically, and a pair of plate-side guide slits 3611 into which the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 is slidably inserted, and a pair of slide plates 3610 A plurality of (four) guide pins 3612 projecting in a columnar shape from positions spaced apart vertically on both lateral sides of the plate-side guide slit 3611 and vertical sides on both lateral sides of the plurality of guide pins 3612. A pair of drive rack gears 3613 and a flat plate-like detection piece 3614 protruding leftward from the drive rack gear 3613 on the left side when viewed from the front. The slide plate 3610 is attached to the turning table 3380 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by inserting the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 into the plate side guide slit 3611. The drive rack gear 3613 is formed so that the gear teeth protrude forward.

  The slide plate 3610 is bent in a crank shape in plan view so that a portion of the drive rack gear 3613 protrudes forward. The slide plate 3610 has a slide gear 3620 extending in front of and behind a portion bent in a crank shape at a rear surface portion behind the drive rack gear 3613 protruding forward from the inner general surface. It is attached so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction so as to be exposed to the front side (inner side) from the portion.

  The slide frame 3630 is formed near the left and right ends of the rear surface, and extends vertically in a pair of movable rack gears 3631 extending vertically and meshing with the slide gears 3620, and inward in the left-right direction of the pair of movable rack gears 3631. And a frame side guide slit 3632 into which the guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is slidably inserted. The slide frame 3630 is formed in a box shape that accommodates the sub-effect display device 3640, and an opening 3633 in which the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 faces forward and a transparent that decorates the outer periphery of the opening 3633. A back-upper upper frame-shaped decorative body 3634 having light properties, and a rear-back-upper decorative board 3635 disposed on the rear side of the back-upper upper frame-shaped decorative body 3634 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

  The pair of movable rack gears 3631 of the slide frame 3630 are formed so that the gear teeth protrude outward in the left-right direction. The pair of movable-side rack gears 3631 are formed so as to face the fixed-side rack gear 3386 of the turning table 3380 in the assembled state, and mesh with a portion of the slide gear 3620 exposed on the front side of the slide plate 3610. To do. Further, the slide frame 3630 is attached to the slide plate 3610 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by inserting the guide pins 3612 of the slide plate 3610 into the frame side guide slit 3632.

  The sub effect display device 3640 is a 7 inch full color liquid crystal display device having a display screen smaller than that of the main effect display device 1600.

  The rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 includes a motor bracket 3651 that is attached to both the left and right outer sides of the pair of fixed side rack gears 3386 on the front surface of the main body 3381 of the turning table 3380, and a side surface that faces the outer side in the left and right direction of the motor bracket 3651. And a rear rear upper drive motor 3652 having a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction extending through the motor bracket 3651 and projecting inwardly, and a slide plate 3610 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear rear upper drive motor 3652. A spur gear-like drive gear 3653 that meshes with the drive rack gear 3613, and a motor cover 3654 that is attached to the front surface of the turning table 3380 so as to cover the front side of the motor bracket 3651 and the rear rear upper drive motor 3652.

  Of the pair of rear rear upper slide drive units 3650, the rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 on the left side when viewed from the front is provided with a slide detection sensor 3655 for detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610. The slide detection sensor 3655 is attached to the motor bracket 3651. By detecting the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 can be detected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state in which the sub effect display device is set to the retracted position farthest from the turning center in the rear rear upper movable effect unit, and FIG. 196 (b) can turn the sub effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state made into the position by schematic structure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state made into the protrusion position which made the sub production | presentation display apparatus the closest to the turning center by schematic structure. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view on the turntable side of the back rear movable effect unit in a state in which the sub effect display device of the back rear upper movable effect unit is in the normal retracted position, and (b) is the sub effect display device. It is a front view by the side of the turntable in the back back movable production | presentation unit shown in the state which was made into the protrusion position.

  In the normal state, the back rear upper movable production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is in the state of the retreat position in which the sub production display device 3640 is most up (the furthest away from the turning center of the turning table 3380) (FIG. 196). (See (a) and FIG. 197 (a)). In the retracted position, the drive gear 3653 of the rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 is engaged in the vicinity of the lower ends of the pair of drive rack gears 3613 of the slide plate 3610. In this state, the pair of slide gears 3620 that are rotatably attached to the slide plate 3610 are located near the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3386 in the turning table 3380 and near the lower end of the movable rack gear 3631 in the slide frame 3630. , Respectively.

  Further, in the state of the retracted position, the detection piece 3614 of the slide plate 3610 is detected by a slide detection sensor 3655 provided in the left rear upper slide drive unit 3650. In the retracted position, as shown in the drawing, a part of the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) is in a state of protruding outward from the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view.

  Further, in the retracted position, the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 is in contact with the lower end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610 and the bottom of the frame-side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the end on the side. This restricts further slide (movement) above the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640).

  When the drive gear 3653 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652 in the retracted position, the slide plate 3610 is moved by the drive rack gear 3613 meshing with the drive gear 3653. Slide downward (in the direction approaching the center of the turntable 3380). When the slide plate 3610 slides downward, the pair of slide gears 3620 attached to the slide plate 3610 also slides (moves) together. At this time, since the fixed-side rack gear 3386 of the turning table 3380 is meshed with the pair of slide gears 3620 from the outside in the left-right direction, the fixed-side meshed when the center of the slide gear 3620 slides downward. The slide gear 3620 is rotated by the rack gear 3386 (the slide gear 3620 on the left side when viewed from the front is in the clockwise direction, and the slide gear 3620 on the right side when viewed from the front is in the counterclockwise direction).

  In each of the pair of slide gears 3620, the movable rack gear 3631 of the slide frame 3630 is engaged from the opposite side to the fixed rack gear 3386, and accordingly, the slide plate 3610 slides downward on the left side when viewed from the front. When the slide gear 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction and the slide gear 3620 on the right side of the front view rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slide frame 3630 is moved by the movable rack gear 3631 meshed with each slide gear 3620. It slides downward at a double speed relative to the slide plate 3610. In other words, the slide frame 3630 slides downward by a distance twice as long as the slide distance of the slide plate 3610. Since the sub effect display device 3640 is attached to the slide frame 3630, the sub effect display device 3640 slides downward (to the turning center side of the turning table 3380) together with the slide frame 3630.

  When the slide frame 3630 slides downward via the slide plate 3610 by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652, the portion located outside the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 in the front view is the outer periphery of the turntable 3380. The slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) slides into the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380 in front view (see FIG. 196 (b)).

  Then, when the slide frame 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) is in the projecting position at the lowest position (close to the turning center of the turning table 3380), the driving of the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652 is stopped ( (See FIGS. 196 (c) and 197 (b)). In the protruding position, substantially the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 attached to the slide frame 3630 is located in the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380 when viewed from the front. In the protruding position, the guide boss 3387 of the turning table 3380 is in contact with the upper end of the plate-side guide slit 3611 in the slide plate 3610 and the upper end of the frame-side guide slit 3632 in the slide frame 3630. The guide pin 3612 of the slide plate 3610 is in contact with the portion. Thereby, further slide (movement) below the slide plate 3610 and the slide frame 3630 (sub effect display device 3640) is restricted.

  In order to return from the protruding position to the retracted position, the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652 rotate the respective drive gears 3653 in the direction opposite to that described above, so that the slide frame 3610 is interposed via the slide plate 3610. 3630 (sub-effect display device 3640) can be slid upward, and by stopping the driving of the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652 based on the detection of the detection piece 3641 of the slide plate 3610 by the slide detection sensor 3655, It can be returned to the retracted position.

  The rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can stop the sub effect display device 3640 at an arbitrary position between the reverse position and the protruding position by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652.

  As described above, the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 approaches the sub effect display device 3640 having a display screen smaller than the main effect display device 1600 to the retreat position and the turn center away from the center (turn center) of the turn table 3380. It can be slid between the protruding positions. In other words, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 moves the sub effect display device 3640 between a position outside the main effect display device 1600 (retracted position) and a front surface side (projecting position) of the main effect display device 1600. Therefore, according to the slide position of the sub effect display device 3640, the effect image (main effect image) by the main effect display device 1600 is made conspicuous, or the effect image (sub effect image by the sub effect display device 3640) ) Can be conspicuous, and the player can entertain the main effect image and the sub-effect image.

[5-9g-1. Production by a rear rear center movable production unit and a rear rear upper movable production unit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201, mainly the effects (movable effects) using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. Will be described in detail. FIG. 198 is a front view of the back and rear movable effect unit, which schematically shows a state in which the sub effect display device is turned to the turnable position at the first turn position. FIG. 199 is a front view of the back and rear movable effect unit showing the movable range of the sub effect display device at the first turning position in a schematic configuration. FIG. 200 is a front view of the back and rear movable effect unit, which schematically illustrates the movable range of the sub effect display device at the second turning position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the back and rear movable effect unit, which schematically illustrates the movable range of the sub effect display device at the third turning position.

  The sub effect display device 3640 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350. It is possible to slide between a retracted position away from the center (turning center) and a protruding position approaching the turning center. When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, a part of the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached is located outside the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in front view. When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the protruding position, the entire slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached is located on the inner side of the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 in the front view, and the sub effect display device. 3640 is located inside the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361.

  The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 has a range between the retracted position and the position where the outer periphery of the slide frame 3630 of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 coincides with the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 when viewed from the front (turning restriction range). ), The turning range of the turning table 3380 is restricted (see FIG. 198). The back rear center movable effect unit 3350 has a first turning position in which the turning position where the turning range of the turning table 3380 is restricted is just above the turning center, and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 (sub-effect display device 3640) is located. The second turning position where the sub effect display device 3640 is located directly to the right of the turning center (the position turned from the first turning position in the clockwise direction of the front view at an angle of 90 degrees), and the sub effect immediately below the turning center. Three turning positions are provided, namely, a third turning position where the display device 3640 is located (a position turned from the second turning position in a clockwise direction in front view at an angle of 90 degrees). The sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) can slide to the reverse position (within the turning restriction range) only when the turning table 3380 is located at any one of the three turning positions.

  Further, when the slide frame 3630 is within the range between the position where the outer periphery coincides with the outer periphery of the turning table 3380 and the protruding position (turnable range) in the front view, the back center movable effect unit 3350 is. The restriction of the turning range of the turning table 3380 is released, and the turning table 3380 (sub-effect display device 3640) can freely turn between the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position. Yes (see FIG. 198).

  The rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is positioned at the first turning position directly above the turning center of the turning table 3380 by the rear rear central movable effect unit 3350 and the sub effect display device 3640 is in a normal state. The rear rear upper slide drive unit 3650 is located at the retracted position away from the turning center (see FIG. 169, etc.).

  In this normal state, since the slide frame 3630 is located within the turning restriction range, the turning range of the sub-effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is ±± by the pair of guide pins 3363 via the slide frame 3630. It is restricted so that it can turn only within the range of the turning angle of 5 degrees (see FIG. 199). Further, in the state of the first turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 can be slid up and down between the retracted position and the protruding position. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position in the state of the first turning position, the upper half of the opening 3361b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub effect display device 3640 can be obtained. The player can entertain the effect image displayed on the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the sub-effect display device 3640 is located on the right side of the turning center at the second turning position turned 90 degrees from the first turning position in the clockwise direction. It is in a state extending up and down on the right side of 3361b (main effect display device 1600). When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the turning restriction range on the retracted position side at the second turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is turned via the slide frame 3630 by the pair of guide pins 3363. It becomes impossible. In the state of the second turning position, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be expanded to the right by the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 by setting the sub effect display device 3640 to the retracted position. It is possible to entertain the player with a wide screen effect image.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the sub effect display device 3640 is located directly below the turning center at the third turning position that is turned from the second turning position in the clockwise direction at a turning angle of 90 degrees. The screen extends left and right. When the slide frame 3630 is slid into the turning restriction range on the retreat position side at the third turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is moved via the slide frame 3630 by the pair of guide pins 3363. It is restricted to a state in which it can turn only within a range of a turning angle of ± 7 degrees. By reciprocatingly turning the turntable 3380 within the swivelable angle range, the sub effect display device 3640 can be swung left and right, and the player can enjoy a physically swarming effect image. it can. Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position in the state of the third turning position, the lower half of the opening 3361b (main effect display device 1600) can be covered, and the sub effect display device. The player can entertain the effect image displayed on 3640.

  As described above, the rear effect display unit 3640 and the rear rear upper movable effect unit 3600 can move the sub effect display device 3640 to various positions around the turning center of the turning table 3380. The movement of the effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed by the player.

[5-9h. Rear back lower movable production unit]
Next, the back and back movable effect unit 3700 in the back and back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a perspective view of the rear rear movable production unit in the rear rear movable production unit of the rear unit, and FIG. 202 (b) is a rear rear lower production production unit in the back rear movable production unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at from back. The back rear lower movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the turning table 3380 in the rear rear center movable effect unit 3350 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300.

  The rear back lower movable production unit 3700 is attached to the lower front portion of the turntable 3380 and has a unit main body 3701 having a light-transmitting geometric pattern decoration formed on the front surface, and a center of the unit main body 3701 in the left-right direction. The rear rear lower drive motor 3702 is attached to the rear surface, and the rotation shaft projects forward through the unit body 3701. The rear rear lower drive motor 3702 is attached to the rotation shaft, and the outer shape is a spur gear. Are formed on the back of the unit main body 3701 and mounted on the front surface with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and back of the back and bottom decorative board 3704. A substrate cover 3705 attached to the unit main body 3701 so as to cover the rear side of the central portion in the left-right direction.

  The unit main body 3701 of the lower rear movable rendering unit 3700 has an outer shape formed by an arc along the outer periphery of the turntable 3380 and a string connecting both ends of the arc. The unit main body 3701 has a circularly-decorated decoration at the center in the left-right direction, and star-shaped decorations are formed on the left and right sides and in the vicinity of both left and right ends. The back rear lower rotating decorative body 3703 is housed in a central circular recess in the unit main body 3701, and is rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction through the center by the back rear lower drive motor 3702.

  The rear back lower decorative board 3704 can light-up decorate the front surface of the unit body 3701 and the back lower rotary decorative body 3703 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  According to the back / back / bottom movable production unit 3700, the back / back / bottom rotating decorative body 3703 can be rotated by the back / back / bottom drive motor 3702. At this time, if the LED of the back back lower decoration board 3704 is appropriately light-emitted, the outer shape of the back back lower rotation decoration body 3703 is formed in a gear shape. It is possible to make it appear as if it is blinking by passing it through, and the player's interest can be attracted to the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3703.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 206 to 211. FIG. 203 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back first rotary decoration body and the back second rotation decoration body of the back movable production unit in the back unit are moved to the lowered position. FIG. 204 shows the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear left movable decoration unit and the back rear right movable decoration of the back rear left movable production unit and the back rear right movable production unit in the state of the first turning position of the turning table in the back unit movable production unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the body unit is moved from the separation position to the approach position. FIG. 205 shows the back and rear left movable decoration unit and the back and right movable decoration of the back and left movable production unit and the back and right movable production unit in the third turning position of the turning table in the back and back movable production unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the body unit is moved from the separation position to the approach position. FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board showing the sub-effect display device in the back-back movable effect unit of the back unit moved to the protruding position at the normal first turning position. FIG. 207 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit is turned from the first turning position to the second turning position in the protruding position. FIG. 208 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub-effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 207 to the retracted position.

  FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board showing the sub effect display device in the back rear movable effect unit of the back unit in the projecting position and moving from the second turning position to the third turning position. FIG. 210 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the sub-effect display device is moved from the state of FIG. 209 to the retracted position. FIG. 211 shows the back rear left rotation decoration body and the back back right rotation decoration in the back back left movable decoration unit and back back right movable decoration body unit of the back back left movable production unit and the back back right movable production unit from the state of FIG. While the decorative body is in the state of the third production position, the back first rotary decoration body and the back second rotation decoration body of the back movable production unit are moved to the lowered position, and the back first rotation decoration body and the back It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which is rotating the upper 2nd rotation decoration body.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 135, etc., the game board 5 in the normal state passes through a transparent game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) outside the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and is decorated in front of the back unit 3000. The decoration of unit 3100 is visible. In addition, in the frame (inside) of the center accessory 2500, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 can be viewed well from the player side (front).

  Further, in the normal state, the back movable main unit 3230 of the back movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is in the raised position, and the upper side of the main production display device 1600 within the frame of the center accessory 2500. Thus, on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550, the back first rotary decorative body 3232 and the back second rotary decorative body 3233 of the back movable main unit 3230 in the back movable effect unit 3200 can be seen.

  Further, in a normal state, the turning table 3380 of the back back center movable effect unit 3350 in the back back movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is in the first turning position, and the back back left movable effect unit 3400 and The back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back back right movable effect unit 3500 are in the separated positions away from the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively. Therefore, a plurality of back left rotating decorative bodies 3410 of the back back left movable effect unit 3400 are visible on the left side of the main effect display device 1600 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the right side of the main effect display device 1600 In addition, a plurality of back right rotation decorative bodies 3510 of the back back right movable effect unit 3500 can be seen. The plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are respectively forward of the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a. It is in the state of the 1st production position towards

  Further, in the normal state, the back and bottom movable effect unit 3700 of the back and rear movable effect unit 3300 located behind the stage 2530 can be seen through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the transparent panel plate 1110. In this normal state, the sub effect display device 3640 in the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300 is located in the retracted position, and the logo decoration unit of the center accessory 2500 arranged on the front side. It is hidden by 2550 and cannot be seen.

  The game board 5 is a front front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. 3100, back rear movable production unit 3200, back rear center movable production unit 3350, back rear left movable production unit 3400, back rear right movable production unit 3500, back rear upper production production unit 3600 and the rear lower movable effect unit 3700 perform a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 129, FIG. 135, etc., the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 and the back top second rotating decorative body. In the state where 3233 is positioned on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3234a of the back decoration board 3234 is appropriately lit so that the back first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration. When the body 3233 is decorated with light emission, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233, and the back top first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back top Attention can be paid to the upper right corner of the game area 5a where the second rotating decoration 3233 is located. This makes the player think that there is something good in the right area in the game area 5a, and hits the game ball so that the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500. A driving operation (so-called right-handed) can be promoted, and a game ball driving operation can be enjoyed.

  In addition, as an effect using the backside movable effect unit 3200, the backside up / down drive motor 3213 is driven to rotate the backside movable main body unit 3230 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, so that the backside first rotating decorative body 3232 is provided. And the back second rotary decorative body 3233 is moved from the rising position on the right side of the logo decoration unit 2550 on the upper side of the main effect display device 1600 to the lowering position on the front surface of the main effect display device 1600 in the center of the game area 5a ( (See FIG. 203). As a result, the back first rotary decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233 whose outer periphery has a deformed polygon shape are positioned at the approximate center on the front side of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600. Since the effect image displayed on the screen is blocked, the player can be conspicuous from the player side, and an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest can be performed.

  In this state, when the back first rotary decorative body 3232 is rotated counterclockwise by the back top rotation drive motor 3235, the back top disposed on the front side of the back top first rotary decorative body 3232. The second rotating decorative body 3233 revolves counterclockwise around the first shaft portion 3232a while rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and is disposed on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 3232 on the back. In addition, it is possible to show a movable effect such that a plurality of the back and forth decorative bodies 3246 appear to protrude outside the back top first rotating decorative body 3232 at different timings. This makes it possible to show the player a moving effect that swirls and scatters stars, giving a strong impact to the player, and something good for the player It can be thought that there is a thing, and it can raise the expectation with respect to a game, and can suppress the fall of interest.

  At this time, the first LED 3234a and the second LED 3234b on the back decoration board 3234 are appropriately caused to emit light, so that the back first rotation decoration body 3232 and the back second rotation decoration body 3233 flicker, and the back top appearance decoration. The effect that the body 3246 (the appearance decoration part 3246b) scatters while shining can be shown, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back back center movable effect unit 3350, the back back left movable effect unit 3400, and the back back right movable effect unit 3500 in the back back movable effect unit 3300, for example, in the normal state, the back back left The back and back left movable decorative body is provided by a back and back left slide drive motor 3466 and a back and back right slide drive motor 3566 of the back and back left slide unit 3460 and back and back right slide unit 3560 in the movable effect unit 3400 and the back and back right movable effect unit 3500. When the unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament unit 3501 are moved to the approach positions close to the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively, as shown in FIG. The body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are the main Out a state located on the front side in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the display device 1600, it is possible to show the effect to cover the left and right of the main effect display device 1600 to the player.

  In this state, on the front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 arranged on the left and right form a part of a ring. Such a decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be focused on the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501. In this state, the central portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the back-back left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back-back right movable decoration body unit 3501 arranged side by side. In addition, it is possible to entertain an effect image that is edged in a circle by the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501.

  In this state, although not shown in the figure, a plurality of back left rotations by the back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531 in the back back left movable decoration unit 3401 and back back right movable decoration unit 3501. The decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotation decorative body 3510 are moved from the first stage position with the first decorative portion 3411a and the first decorative portion 3511a facing forward, respectively, and the second decorative portion 3411b and the second decorative portion 3511b. Is appropriately rotated to the second effect position facing forward or the third effect position 3411c and the third decorating part 3511c facing forward respectively (see FIG. 189). Thereby, since the decoration aspect of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 changes, a various effect can be shown to a player and it can make a player hard to get tired.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the turning table 3380 is set to the third turning position, and the rear back upper movable effect. With the sub effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 set to the retracted position, the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 are moved to the approach positions close to the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively. (See FIG. 205). In this state, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 is located below the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 covering both the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. positioned. As a result, even if the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are covered by the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501, the sub effect display arranged below the sub effect display. The display screen of the device 3640 can compensate for the reduction of the display area, and the decorations of the back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 and the effects of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 The effect by the image can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Also in the state of FIG. 205, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531 to change the decoration changes. Can be entertained.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, the turning table 3380 is set to the third turning position, and the back rear upper movable effect. With the sub-effect display device 3640 of the unit 3600 in the retracted position (the state shown in FIG. 208), the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 approach the turning center of the turning table 3380, respectively. Move to the approached position. Although illustration is omitted, in this state, the back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 formed in an arc shape is positioned below the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 above the center of the main effect display device 1600. The back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 that is also formed in an arc shape is positioned above the stage 2530 that is below the center of the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600 It is possible to show the player an effect that covers the upper side and the lower side of the player.

  In this state, on the front surface of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 that are arranged vertically form a part of a ring. Such a decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be focused on the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501. Further, in this state, the center portion of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 faces forward in a circular shape from between the back and back movable decorative unit 3401 and the back and right movable decorative unit 3501 arranged vertically. In addition, it is possible to entertain an effect image that is edged in a circle by the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501.

  Furthermore, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted as an effect | action using the back back center movable production | generation unit 3350, the back back left movable production unit 3400, and the back back right movable production unit 3500, back back left movable decoration body unit 3401 and back back. By moving only one of the right movable decorative body units 3501 from the separation position to the approach position, it is possible to show the player an effect that covers only one side of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. . Thus, by appropriately selecting the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 to be moved between the separation position and the approach position, various effects can be presented to the player. It is possible to entertain the game by making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 in the back back movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is set as the first turning position, and the sub effect display device is used. In the normal state with 3640 as the retracted position, each of the drive gears 3653 is moved to the right side by the rear rear upper drive motor 3652 provided in each of the pair of rear rear upper slide drive units 3650 in the rear rear upper movable production unit 3600. When the slide frame 3630 is rotated clockwise from the view and the slide frame 3630 is slid from the retracted position away from the turning center of the turning table 3380 to the protruding position approaching the turning center, the slide frame 3630 Together with the sub-effect display device 3640 is the protruding position So that the downward movement).

  At this time, the sub effect display device 3640 hidden behind the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in the retracted position moves gradually from the lower end of the logo decoration unit 2550 to gradually move from the player side. By stopping at the protruding position, the upper half of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side is covered (see FIG. 206). Thereby, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 can be seen from the player side, and the player's interest is displayed on the effect image (sub effect image) displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. An effect that can be attracted can be performed.

  As a result, a sub-effect display device 3640 that is different from the main effect display device 1600 appears, so that the player may think that an important effect image is displayed on the sub-effect display device 3640. It is possible to entertain the effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640. In addition, the appearance of the sub-effect display device 3640 can suggest the player that a chance has arrived, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position at the first turning position, or when moved to the protruding position, the back rear turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back center movable effect unit 3350 The turning table 3380 may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined turning angle range. As a result, the sub effect display device 3640 that can be seen from the player side swings back and forth by reciprocating, and the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 physically swings. The production can be shown to the player. Thereby, since the sub effect display device 3640 is shaken with the displayed effect image, the movement of the sub effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. At this time, by swinging the sub effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be more enjoyed and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, a pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652 rotate a slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached. While being positioned within the possible range, the back turn drive motor 3370 rotates the turn table 3380 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front to the second turn position (see FIG. 207). Thereby, the sub effect display device 3640 that is visible below the logo decoration unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). Can be shown to the player.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located in the turnable range from the first turn position to the second turn position, the horizontally long sub effect display device 3640 becomes a vertically long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the state is such that the right half of the display screen is covered, it is possible for the player to entertain changes in the orientation of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned in a state where, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as an effect image on the display screen of the sub effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub effect display device 3640. ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player seem to move to another stage (for example, develop from a normal reach effect). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After the sub effect display device 3640 is turned to the second turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) positioned within the turnable range is moved to the retreat position by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652. Then, the sub effect display device 3640 is arranged on the right side of the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, an effect using the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 can be shown to the player. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information about the game, and to make the player less tired. . Alternatively, an effect image in which the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded to the right by displaying effect images constituting one image by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, respectively. Can be shown to the player, and a powerful production image can be enjoyed by the wide screen extending to the left and right.

  Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the second turning position and the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 208, the sub effect display device 3640 is located near the right end of the game area 5a. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be suitably used for the display of the effect image that prompts the player to insert the game ball so that the game ball flows on the right side of the accessory 2500, and the player can input the game ball. Can be entertained.

  Further, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub effect display device 3640 is attached by the pair of back rear upper drive motors 3652 in the state of the second turning position. With the slide frame 3630 being positioned within the swivelable range, the back turn drive motor 3370 rotates the turn table 3380 90 degrees clockwise to the third turn position (see FIG. 209). ). Thereby, the sub-effect display device 3640 covering the right side of the main effect display device 1600 shows the player an effect that turns around the center of the main effect display device 1600 (the turning center of the turning table 3380). be able to.

  By turning the sub effect display device 3640 located within the turnable range from the second turn position to the third turn position, the vertically long sub effect display device 3640 becomes a horizontally long state, and the main effect display device 1600 Since the state is such that the lower half of the display screen is covered, it is possible for the player to enjoy the change in the orientation of the sub-effect display device 3640. At this time, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned in a state where, for example, a predetermined character is displayed as an effect image on the display screen of the sub effect display means, the character moves (turns) together with the sub effect display device 3640. ) Can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. Further, by moving (turning) the character (sub-effect display device 3640), it is possible to make the player seem to move to another stage (for example, develop from a normal reach effect). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next state and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  After the sub effect display device 3640 is turned to the third turning position, the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) located within the turnable range is moved to the retracted position by the pair of rear rear upper drive motors 3652. Then, the sub effect display device 3640 is arranged below the main effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 210). Thereby, it is possible to show the player an effect that uses the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3640 arranged in the vertical direction. For example, by displaying different effect images on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, it is possible to provide the player with a lot of information about the game, and to make the player less tired. . Alternatively, an effect image in which the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is expanded downward by causing the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 to individually display effect images constituting one image. It can be shown to the player, and a powerful production image can be enjoyed by the vertically long screen extending vertically.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the third turning position and in the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 210, the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 is displayed after the stage 2530 through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 1110. Looks to the side. Therefore, by displaying an effect image indicating the stage 2530 and the first start port 2002 on the sub effect display device 3640 according to the game state, the game ball aiming at the first start port 2002 for the player is displayed. The driving operation can be encouraged to entertain the game ball.

  Further, at the third turning position, the turning table 3380 may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined turning angle range by the back-back turning drive motor 3370 of the fixed side unit 3360 in the back-side center movable effect unit 3350. As a result, the sub effect display device 3640 that is visible below the main effect display device 1600 reciprocates and swings left and right, and the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 physically swings. You can show the player what to do. Accordingly, since the sub effect display device 3640 is shaken together with the displayed effect image, the movement of the sub effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed, and the first position located on the front side of the sub effect display device 3640 can be enjoyed. The player's interest can be directed to one start port 2002. At this time, by swinging the sub effect display device 3640 so as to be related to the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600, the player can be more enjoyed and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, illustration is omitted, but in addition to the above, from the first turning position to the third turning position, the second turning position. The sub effect display device 3640 may be turned without being stopped. Alternatively, the sub effect display device 3640 may be rotated in an appropriate direction between any of the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position, and the sub effect display device 3640 may be turned at any position. You may make it move suitably between the retreat position away from the center, and the protrusion position which approached the turning center. In this way, by using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved to various positions and can be moved in various ways. A variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 and the back back lower movable effect unit 3700, for example, with the turning table 3380 in the first turning position, the back of the back back lower movable effect unit 3700 is provided. When the back / rear / lower rotating decorative body 3703 is rotated by the rear / lower driving motor 3702, the player is presented with the effect that the back / rear / lower rotating decorative body 3703, which is visible behind the stage 2530, rotates through the transparent center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 1110. (See FIG. 206 and the like). Accordingly, the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating back and bottom rotating decorative body 3703, so that the player is also placed on the stage 2530 and the first start port 2002 of the center accessory 2500 visible on the front side. Can be attracted, and the player can be urged to perform a game ball driving operation aiming at the first starting port 2002, and can entertain the game ball driving operation.

  Further, when the back / rear / lower rotation decorative body 3703 is rotated by the back / rear / lower drive motor 3702 of the back / rear / lower movable effect unit 3700 with the swivel table 3380 in the second swivel position, In addition, it is possible to show the player the effect of rotating the back and bottom rotating decorative body 3703 visible above the warp inlet 2520 through the transparent center role 2500 and the panel plate 1110 (see FIGS. 207 and 208). Thereby, since the player's interest can be attracted to the rotating back and bottom rotating decorative body 3703, the player's interest can be attracted to the left side of the center accessory 2500. On the other hand, the game ball can be urged to make a left strike through the left side of the center object 2500, and the game ball can be plunged.

  Subsequently, as an effect using the back upper movable effect unit 3200 and the back rear movable effect unit 3300, for example, the turning table 3380 is at the third turning position, and the sub effect display device of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is used. The rear back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are moved to the approach positions close to the turning center of the turning table 3380 in the state where 3640 is set in the retracted position, and then the rear back left movable. The plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 of the decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are arranged with the third decorative portion 3411c and the third decorative portion 3511c facing forward. While rotating to the state of the three production positions, the back movable main unit 3230 of the back movable production unit 3200 is moved from the raised position. Is moved to the descending position rotates the second rotating decorative body 3233 first rotating decorative body 3232 and on the back on the back with (see Figure 211).

  As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is moved to the rear back and left movable effect unit 3400 of the back upper movable effect unit 3200, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500. It is in a state covered with the decoration body unit 3401 and the back right-side movable decoration body unit 3501, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5 a and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be displayed. By covering, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good (for example, the start of a “big hit” game), and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 211, the back top first rotating decorative body 3232, the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 covering the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are displayed. Since the display screen of the sub effect display device 3640 faces forward, the effect image of the sub effect display device 3640 can be shown even if the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 is not visible. Can also entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back upper movable effect unit 3200 and the rear rear movable effect unit 3300, in FIG. 211, a plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are rotated to the third effect position. However, it can also be in the state of the first effect position or in the state of being rotated to the second effect position, and the rotation of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 By appropriately selecting the position, various pattern effects can be presented to the player.

  Further, as an effect using the back movable movable effect unit 3200 and the back rear movable effect unit 3300, FIG. 211 shows the state of the turning table 3380 in the third turning position, but the first turning position or the second turning position is shown. It can also be in the state of the turning position, and various effects can be shown to the player.

  As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 in the back front decoration unit 3100, the back upper movable effect unit 3200, and the back rear movable effect unit 3300, It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. using the rear back right movable effect unit 3500, the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600, and the back rear lower move effect unit 3700 as appropriate. Various combinations of effects can be presented to the player by combining them as appropriate, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and making the player entertained by various effects, It can suppress that interest falls.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame side effect display device 460, and a main effect based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball due to the rotation operation of the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3102 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3101 that detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a gaming ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a large detecting ball that is received in the big winning opening 2005. A first receiving port sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball received by the first receiving port 2007 after being detected by the winning port sensor 2403 and the big winning port sensor 2403, and a second receiving port after being detected by the big winning port sensor 2403 A second receiving sensor 2405 that detects a game ball received in 2008, and a magnetism that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. Capacitors 3103, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416 to A drive signal is output, or from the main control I / O port, a status indicator 1401, a normal symbol indicator 1402, a normal hold indicator 1403, a first special symbol indicator 1404, a first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 A drive signal is output to the display 1405, the second special symbol display 1406, the second special reservation number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the big prize port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 are not included. In contrast to the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the general winning opening sensor 3101 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2402, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3102, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered. The detection of the game ball by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second entrance sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity winning switches 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also use proximity switches that have high durability and a long service life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3101 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3101 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU will be described in detail later, but when receiving various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
A payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682 and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 255. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input control port via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 839). “3” is displayed If there is a “counting switch error”, the fact that the payout detection sensor 842 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 is notified, and the number “5” is displayed. If the number “6” is displayed, a “retry error” notification is made (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 270 is full) and the number “7” is displayed. If it is, “CR not connected” is notified (that the electrical connection is cut off from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number “9” is displayed. (Specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) message indicating "stock" when there are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining level on the ball rental return display unit 330. Is input and displayed in the ball rental return display unit 330.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 is omitted in detail, but the firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches regarding the firing are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 255 based on the launch reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 302, and a single button that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the ball. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 250 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs presentation control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame side effect based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. The display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub effect display device 3640 are provided.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is sent from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the first effect driving board 3032 and the second effect driving. The game board side drive data for transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for transmitting to the board 3033 or operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is sent from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board. The signal is transmitted to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033, and the drive signal to the electric drive source such as the vibration motor 424 provided on the door frame 3 is output. Door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. A screen for transmitting door-side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side, or displaying it on the door frame-side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3640. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the sound from the display control unit serial I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is also transmitted. Or output to a sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are sent to the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Via the peripheral control MPU. A detection signal from the press detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal as sound information is sent to the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting flashing command, game board side lighting flashing command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the first presentation drive board 3032 and the second presentation drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, It is executed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the movable body drive command and the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 output a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LEDs of the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the first effect drive board 3032 and the second effect drive board 3033 send a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. Etc.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is a microprocessor. As a display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (display control for the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640). Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, and is stored in the image ROM. Image RAM to which various data is transferred and copied , And a.

  This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame side effect display device. 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 are controlled for drawing. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control data (display) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. A plurality of schedule data corresponding to the command), non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command), and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Is stipulated. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. This non-resident area transfer data is obtained by converting screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 in advance from the image ROM to the image RAM non-resident area according to the progress of the schedule data. The order in which various data is transferred is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, Then, drawing data to be displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Further, the VDP displays an execution signal indicating that when the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the display control MPU. Output to. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 is held in the line buffer. In this method, the drawing data for one line held in the buffer is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This will affect the drawing speed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, the data for drawing each person is “sprite”. Call. Thereby, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition order”) is set, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect. Drawing is performed on the display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  Door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, and sub effect display device 3640 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right as viewed from the front. It is driven by main scanning and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing one direction. The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 receive the door frame side effect as main scanning when the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input. When viewed from the front of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 move to the line immediately below as the sub-scan, and similarly the drawing data for the next line. Is input from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3640 as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Sequentially output to pixels for one line.

[7. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, so that the game balls are used as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and go back and forth, and are released forward from either the top of the center in the left-right direction or the troughs on the left and right sides of the top. Is done. When a game ball is released from the top at the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the top is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and is therefore accepted with high probability into the first start port 2002. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game balls rolling on the stage 2530 are released into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, they flow down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a are the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the game ball is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the left shelf 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, etc. of the start port unit 2100 may be accepted. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate unit 2003 with a certain probability.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery result of the normal lottery is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 that is closed is closed. Is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls for which “normal hit” is selected in the gate unit 2003 can be received at the second start port 2004.

  If a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ Game balls can be received in the middle prize, small hit, per probability change (probability change), per time reduction (shorter time), and per feature (V prize opening (first entrance 2007). A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “ Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “short time (short time)”, “short per time when probability change”, “no per short time when probability change”, “second big hit (for example, per feature)”, etc. is there.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of games from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout control board 951. The ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to receive game balls, a lot of gaming balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the winning prize opening 2005 When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “per bonus item”, the first winning entrance 2007 is set for a predetermined time after the special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball in a predetermined pattern. When a game ball can be received at the (V winning opening) and the game ball is received at the first receiving port 2007, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600 (or the sub effect display device 3640). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in main effect display device 1600 (sub-effect display device 3640), based on a control signal from main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by peripheral control board 1510, and a special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the main effect display device 1600 is a state in which each pattern row is changed in a state where three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The lines are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture lines are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture lines to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 (first operation) in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the third effect operation unit 400B, etc.), the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the decorative rotating body unit 530, etc.), and the back unit 3000. The back rear center movable effect unit 3350, the back rear left movable effect unit 3400, the back rear right movable effect unit 3500, and the back rear upper moveable effect. Using the unit 3600 and the rear rear lower movable effect unit 3700, etc. as appropriate, the light emission effect and the movable performance , It is possible to perform the display effect, and the like, also can entertain a player with various effects of interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The main effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment uses the effect display means of the present invention as a rear and rear left movable decoration in the back and rear movable effect unit 3400 and the back and rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back and rear movable effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment. The back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 of the body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 are the decorative body of the present invention, the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base in the present embodiment. 3520 is the shutter of the present invention, and the back rear left decorative substrate 3421 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3521 are the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the first The four bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 are The decorative covering of the invention, the back left rear drive motor 3431 and the back right rear drive motor 3531 in this embodiment is the rotation driving means of the present invention, and corresponds respectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the driving gear 3432 and the driving gear 3532, the relay gear 3433 and the relay gear 3533, the back rear left driving rack 3434 and the back rear right driving rack 3534, the driven gear portion 3435a and the transmission gear member of the lower transmission gear member 3435 are provided. The driven gear portion 3535a of the lower 3535, the driven gear portion 3436a of the upper transmission gear member 3436, and the driven gear portion 3536a of the upper transmission gear member 3536 are added to the transmission mechanism of the present invention, the driving gear 3432 and the driving gear 3532 in this embodiment, and the relay. Gear 3433 and relay gear 3533, back rear left drive rack 3434 and back rear right drive rack 3534, transmission gear member lower 3435 and transmission gear member lower 3535, transmission gear member upper 3436 and transmission gear member upper 3536, rotation gear 3437 and rotation The gear 3537 is the rotary driving machine of the present invention. Further, the lower working rack gear 3434b, the upper working rack gear 3434c, the lower working rack gear 3534b, and the upper working rack gear 3534c in the present embodiment are the working rack gear of the present invention, and the rotary coupling mechanism 3450 in the present embodiment is the universal shaft joint of the present invention. , Respectively.

  Furthermore, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back back right slide drive motor 3566 of the back back left slide unit 3460 and back back right slide unit 3560 in the present embodiment correspond to the opening / closing drive means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are in the separated positions, respectively, so that the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base The display screen of the main effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the space 3520 can be viewed in good condition from the front (player side), and the player is identified by the effect image from the main effect display device 1600. Can entertain. In this state, since the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are located on both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600, each of the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 is provided. A plurality of back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 attached to the front face can decorate both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600 and improve the appearance in the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention. A pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 is provided by a back back left slide drive motor 3466 and a back back right slide drive motor 3566 in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. Is moved from the separation position to the approach position, the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right base 3520 are positioned in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 to block the effect image. Since the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 move to the center side of the front view game area 5a and change their positions, the player's interest is a pair of back rear left base 3420 and back rear right A plurality of back rear left rotating decorations 3410 and back rear right rotating decorations attached to the base 3520 and the respective back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 Can be strongly attracted to the 510, and then wonder whether not there's something good to the player can be to heighten the anticipation for the game. When the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 are driven in a state where the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved to the approach position, the respective back back left base 3420 is driven. In addition, among the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in an arc on the front surface of the back rear right base 3520, the first back rear left arranged alternately. Rotating decorative body 3410A and first back rear right rotating decorative body 3510A and third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C shaft 3412 and rotating gear 3437 attached to the shaft 3512. And a transmission gear portion 3435c and a transmission gear portion 3535c meshing with the rotary gear 3537, and a transmission gear portion 3436c and a transmission gear portion 3536c. The rear gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, and the transmission gear member upper 3536 are rotated via the rear rear left drive rack 3434, the rear rear right drive rack 3534, and the like. The decorative body main body 3411 and the decorative body main body 3511 (the first back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3410A and the first back-back rotated decorative body 3410A When the first back right rotating decorative body 3510A, the third back back left rotating decorative body 3410C, and the third back back right rotating decorative body 3510C) are rotated about the axis of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. At the same time, it is adjacent to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 to which the rotation gear 3437 and the rotation gear 3537 are attached. Since the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 are coupled by the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 so as to be able to transmit the rotation, the rotation of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 is possible even if the extending direction of the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 is different. The second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B and the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D and the fourth through the rotation coupling mechanism 3450 can be transmitted. The back right rotation decorative body 3510D will also rotate.

  As described above, the driving from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 is performed for the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 arranged in a row. The rotation is transmitted to every other via the drive rack 3434, the rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, etc. The second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B and the fourth back rear left rotating decorative body 3410D and the fourth back rear right through the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. Since the rotating decorative body 3510D is rotated, it is arranged in an arc shape by one back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531 so that the rotation shaft A plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 having different extending directions can be simultaneously rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531, and the respective shafts can be rotated. Since the axis of the part 3412 and the shaft part 3512 extends along the surfaces of the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are provided. When stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, the three-dimensionally formed decorative body 3411 and the portion facing the front of the decorative body main body 3511 are changed. It is possible to change the appearance of 3410 and the back-right rotation decorative body 3510. Therefore, after moving the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 to the approach position, the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are rotated to be seen from the player side. By changing the appearance of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510, even after the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the approach positions and closed, In the back rear left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, it is possible to continuously show a movable effect by a plurality of back back left rotation decorations 3410 and back back right rotation decorations 3510, and it is difficult to get the player bored by multi-stage effects. In addition, a plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear right rotation decorations 3510 rotate, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved. Increase makes it possible, a reduction in the interest entertained player can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are in the separated state, the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 respectively provide a plurality of back back left rotating decorations 3410 and back When the rear right rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated, the decorations on both outer sides of the main effect display device 1600 by the plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be changed (changed). The appearance in the game area 5a can be greatly changed, the player's interest is strongly attracted to make it difficult to get bored, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be changed to increase appeal to the player It is possible to make it easier for a player who is selecting a pachinko machine to play to select the pachinko machine 1.

  The pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved by a back back left slide drive motor 3466 and a back back right slide drive motor 3566, respectively, and each of them is independently set to an approach position. Since it can be moved between the separation positions, only one of the pair of rear rear left base 3420 and rear rear right base 3520 can be moved between the approach position and the separation position, or the pair of rear rear left bases 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are simultaneously moved in directions opposite to each other between the approach position and the separation position, or the pair of back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are simultaneously moved between the approach position and the separation position. They can be moved in the same direction. Each of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 includes a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410, back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510, back back left drive motor 3431, and back back right drive motors. 3531 is attached to the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right, regardless of the position between the approach rear position and the rear rear right base 3520. A plurality of back rear rotation decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 can be rotated by the drive motor 3531.

  Accordingly, the movement of the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 by the back back left slide drive motor 3466 and back back right slide drive motor 3566 and the back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531 respectively. By appropriately combining the rotation of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 attached to the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, various movable effects can be achieved. It can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and making it possible to more enjoy the movable effects using the back rear left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, the plurality of back rear left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decoration bodies 3510 are arranged such that the shaft portions 3412 and 3512 are parallel to the front surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Accordingly, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged along the front surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the depth in the front-rear direction necessary for the arrangement of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right A plurality of back-rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back-rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 can be reliably disposed on the front surface side of the base 3520, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be provided. . Moreover, since the depth concerning the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be reduced, the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are relatively enlarged. Or other members (e.g., main effect display device 1600, game panel 1100) on the front and back of the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the back rear left base 3420, and the back rear right base 3520. , A center accessory 2500, a swivel table 3380, etc.), and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are arranged in a narrow space (for example, a game panel 1100 and a main effect display device 1600) And the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Furthermore, the main effect display device 1600 has a rectangular shape whose front view is a horizontally long shape, and the moving direction connecting the approach position and the separation position in the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 Since the length in the perpendicular direction is formed longer than the short side of the outer shape of the main effect display device 1600, the back rear left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 display the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Because the size (length) is such that it extends over, the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are moved by the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 when the back back left base 3520 is moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600. When the covered part becomes wider and the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are moved to the front side of the main effect display device 1600, Obtain impact can be enhanced, it can be allowed more entertaining players to suppress the lowering of interest. Further, for example, when both longitudinal ends of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are supported so as to be movable between the approach position and the separation position, the guide members (for example, for example) The slide shaft 3462 and the slide shaft 3562, the slide guide 3463 and the slide guide 3563, etc.) are arranged outside the main effect display device 1600 in the front view, and it is possible to make it difficult to prevent the effect image by the guide member. It is possible to entertain the effect image to the player in a good state.

  Also, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, the first bearing cover 3426, which cover the front side of the rotary coupling mechanism 3450 and the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531. Since the two bearing cover 3527 and the fourth bearing cover 3529 are attached to the front surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, and the fourth bearing cover 3429 are provided. The first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 can hide the rotation coupling mechanism 3450, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 from the player side. , The rotation connecting mechanism 3450, the back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 Appearance of the game area 5a Te can be reduced from becoming worse. Further, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, and the second bearing cover that hide the rotation coupling mechanism 3450, the rear back left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531. 3527 and the fourth bearing cover 3529, the first bearing cover 3426, the second bearing cover 3427, the fourth bearing cover 3429, the first bearing cover 3526, the second bearing cover 3527, and the fourth bearing cover 3529 The front surface of the rear back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 can be decorated in the region 5a, and the player can be entertained with good appearance.

  Further, when the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved to the approach position, a plurality of back back left rotation decorations 3410 and back back right rotation decorations 3510 attached to the respective front surfaces are obtained. Since they are arranged in an annular shape, the player's interest can be strongly directed toward the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved to the separation position, the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 5a. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance by decorating the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Further, by moving the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 to the approach position or to the separation position, a plurality of back back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 arranged in an arc shape and The diameter of the virtual ring formed by the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be reduced or increased. Accordingly, when the pair of back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved from the separation position to the approach position, a virtual ring formed by the plurality of back back left rotation decorations 3410 and back back right rotation decorations 3510 is formed. Therefore, the player's interest can be directed toward the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the pair of back rear left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are moved from the approach position to the separation position, a virtual ring by the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 is formed. Since it becomes large, a player's interest can be directed to the outer peripheral side of the game area | region 5a.

  Further, since the plurality of back rear left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 are arranged in an arc shape centering on the center side of the turning table 3380, for example, a plurality of back rear left rotating decoration bodies 3510 are arranged. When the respective ends of the body 3410 and the back-right rotating decorative body 3510 facing the center side of the game area 5a are rotated forward, a movable effect that flows forward from the center of the game area 5a is produced. It can be shown to the player, and the player can be given an illusion that the wind is blowing. Alternatively, if each of the plurality of back rear left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 is rotated so that the end portions facing the center side of the game area 5a move backward, the center of the game area 5a is obtained. It is possible to show the player a movable effect that flows backward from the player, and the player can be given an illusion of being drawn into the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to turn the player's interest toward the center of the game area 5a by rotating the plurality of back-rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back-back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 arranged in an arc shape. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs provided on the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right decorative board 3521 are appropriately illuminated, the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are light-decorated. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 and make the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 stand out. It is possible to attract the interest of the player and to raise the sense of expectation for the game by making the player think that there is something. Further, the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right in the state where the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are rotated by the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531. When the LED of the decorative substrate 3521 is caused to emit light, the orientation of the decorative body main body 3411 and the decorative body main body 3511 that are three-dimensionally formed by rotation changes, so that the front back rear left rotation decorative body 3410 and the back rear right from the LED. The refraction, reflection direction, transmission amount, and the like of the light applied to the rotating decorative body 3510 change gradually, so that the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are blinking. It can be shown, and it can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Further, the rear back left decorative board 3421 and the rear rear are moved in a state where the rear rear left base 3420 and the rear rear right base 3520 are moved to the approach position by the rear rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the rear rear right slide drive motor 3566. When the LED on the right decoration board 3521 is caused to emit light, the player can be shown a light-emitting decoration with a brightness that is clearly different from the effect image of the main effect display device 1600, so the player's interest is directed toward the center of the game area 5a. Can be made. In addition, the back back left decorative board 3421 is moved in a state where the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are moved to the approach position and the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are rotated. When the LEDs on the back rear right decorative board 3521 are caused to emit light, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 flash in the front of the main effect display device 1600. Since it can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation connecting mechanism 3450 includes a shaft part 3412 to be connected, a pair of arm parts 3451 protruding from the shaft part 3512, and a cross-shaped spider 3452 inserted between the arm parts 3541. Since the rotation is transmitted through the spider 3452, the rotation by the expansion or contraction (spring constant) of the rubber or the spring is compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by using the rubber or the spring. The transmission time lag can be eliminated, and the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be rotated simultaneously. Accordingly, when the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotates at the same time, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 rotate in order in a delayed manner, which makes the player feel unnatural. Can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the player can enjoy the movement of the back-rear-left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-rear-right rotation decoration body 3510 that have a sense of unity, and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, in the rotation coupling mechanism 3450, the transmission portion 3451a of the spider 3451 is sandwiched between the side surface of the arm portion 3451 of one shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 and the side surface of the other shaft portion 3412 and the arm portion 3451 of the shaft portion 3512. As a result, it is possible to assemble the rotary coupling mechanism 3450 that couples the two shaft portions 3412 and the shaft portions 3512 so as to be able to transmit rotation, so that a universal joint or a constant velocity shaft joint can be used as the rotational coupling mechanism (universal shaft joint). Compared to the case of adopting the above, the number of parts can be reduced, and the labor for assembling can be facilitated, and the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the plurality of rear back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 arranged in a row, the first back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410A and the first back back right rotation decorations that are positioned alternately are arranged. The rotating gear 3437, the rotating gear 3537, the lower transmission gear member 3435, and the transmission are transmitted to the decorative body 3510A and the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512 of the third back rear left rotating decorative body 3410C and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C. Since the drive from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 is transmitted through the gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, and the like, it is rotated. Accumulation (influence) of backlash in the rotation direction in the mechanism 3450 can be reduced as much as possible. Accordingly, the second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410B and the second back rear right rotation decoration body 3510B, the fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D, and the fourth back rear right rotation decoration body that are rotated through the rotation coupling mechanism 3450. Since the time lag of the rotation of 3510D can be made as small as possible, a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are rotated by back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531. When this is done, it becomes possible to rotate the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 substantially simultaneously, and the movement of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 (Rotation) is provided with a sense of unity, and the effect of producing a movable effect by the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be sufficiently exhibited. Can be a pachinko machine 1 exhibits reliably effects described above.

  Furthermore, with respect to the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 arranged in rows, the second back rear left rotating decorative body 3410B and the second back rear right rotating decorative body 3510B, Since the third back rear rotating decorative body 3410C and the third back rear right rotating decorative body 3510C are not connected by the rotary connecting mechanism 3450, the rotating gear 3437 and the rotating gear 3537 are attached to the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft portion 3512. Sandwiched between two first back-rear-rotating decorative body 3410A and first back-rear-right rotating decorative body 3510A, third back-rear-left rotating decorative body 3410C, and third back-rear-right rotating decorative body 3510C. It is possible to prevent rotation from being transmitted from both sides to the second back back left rotation decoration body 3410B and the second back back right rotation decoration body 3510B, and the second back back left rotation decoration body 3 Rotation of 10B and the second back right after rotating the decorative body 3510B can be prevented from being jerky. Accordingly, when the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531, the respective back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and back Since the rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be rotated substantially simultaneously without a sense of incongruity, the effect of the rotation of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be sufficiently exerted. Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the shaft portion 3412 and the shaft of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 extending in parallel to the surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 (surfaces extending vertically and horizontally). The rotation gear 3437 and the rotation gear 3537 are attached to the portion 3512, and the transmission gear portion 3435c and the transmission gear portion 3535c, the transmission gear portion 3436c, and the transmission gear portion are arranged from the rear side of the rotation gear 3437 and the rotation gear 3537. The transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, and the transmission gear member upper 3536 can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the transmission gear member lower 3435 and the transmission gear member are engaged with each other. Lower gear 3535 and transmission gear member upper 3436 and driven gear portion 3435 at the rear end of transmission gear member upper 3536 In addition, the driven gear portion 3436a, the driven gear portion 3535a, and the driven gear portion 3436a are provided with a rod-like rear rear left drive rack 3434 and a rear rear right drive rack 3534 as a transmission mechanism, a lower operation rack gear 3434b, an upper operation rack gear 3434c, and a lower operation rack gear. The rear rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear rear right drive rack 3534 are slid by the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 after the 3534b and the upper rack gear 3534c are engaged with each other. 3435 and the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436 and the transmission gear member upper 3536 via the rear rear left drive rack 3434 and the rear rear right drive rack 3534 and the like, and the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531. To transmit the drive from Because it to rotate, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the longitudinal direction of the depth (thickness) in the back left rear drive rack 3434 and back right rear drive rack 3534 and the like. Therefore, even if a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 are attached to the front surfaces of the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, they can be made difficult to come into contact with other members. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. Further, as described above, the depth in the front-rear direction in the back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, and the like. Since (thickness) can be made as thin as possible, the depth in the front-rear direction of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be relatively increased. The back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be made conspicuous. Alternatively, a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 can be arranged at a narrow position, and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 (back The degree of freedom of arrangement of the rear left base 3420 and the rear rear right base 3520) can be increased.

  Further, the rear rear left drive motor 3431 and the rear rear right drive motor 3531 are driven by the rod-shaped rear rear left drive rack 3434 and rear rear right drive rack 3534 on the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, and the transmission gear member. 3436 and the transmission gear member 3536 are transmitted to the side. Therefore, by selecting the lengths of the back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right The drive motor 3531 can be arranged at a position that is as inconspicuous as possible as far as possible from the plurality of back-back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back-back right rotation decoration body 3510, and relatively a plurality of back-back left rotation decoration bodies 3410. And the back right rotation decoration 3510 can be made conspicuous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of decorative body main bodies 3411 and decorative body main bodies 3511 (a back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and a back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 formed in a three-dimensional manner. ) Are rotated at the same time, and when the rotation of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 is stopped at an appropriate rotation angle, the outer periphery of the decoration body main body 3411 and the decoration body main body 3511 Since it is possible to change the part facing forward, it is possible to change the appearance of a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 that can be seen from the player side. It can give a strong impact and can entertain the player, and the rotation stop angle can be set in multiple stages (here, three stages). The apparent back after left rotation decorative body 3410 and back right rear rotary decoration member 3510 can be variously changed, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  By the way, the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 to which the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 are attached extend back and forth by the unit base 3361 of the fixed unit 3360. Since it is attached to the front surface of the swivel table 3380 that is rotatably mounted around the shaft, the swivel table 3380 is attached to the swivel table 3380 by rotating the back turn drive motor 3370 according to the gaming state. The plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are centered around the center of the turning table 3380, that is, the center of the game area 5a via the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520. As a result, the whole will turn around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The position where the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 are arranged can be changed variously such as the left side, right side, upper side, lower side, diagonally upper side, diagonally lower side, etc. The pachinko machine 1 that can change the decoration (appearance) in the game area 5a and strongly attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Further, by reciprocatingly rotating the turntable 3380, the entire back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be swung (vibrated). It can be strongly attracted to the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510. Accordingly, a plurality of back back left rotating decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotating decoration bodies 3510 attached to the back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 by the back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531. By appropriately combining the rotation and turning of the back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 via the turn table 3380 by the back back turning drive motor 3370, various effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less tired, and to enhance the effect of the rotating back-and-back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-and-back right rotating decorative body 3510 and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  In addition, since a plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510 can be rotated by one back rear left drive motor 3431 and back rear right drive motor 3531, as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a drive motor for each decorative body, and the space required for the drive motor can be reduced as much as possible. This is necessary for the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510. The space can be made relatively wide. Accordingly, for example, the space between the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be relatively widened, so the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 The rear rotation left decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are made larger and more conspicuous, the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and It is possible to increase the impact when the number of the back-back-right rotation decoration bodies 3510 is increased and rotated. The production effect can be further increased, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since only one back rear left drive motor 3431 and one back back right drive motor 3531 are required, a plurality of back back left rotating decorations 3410 and back back mounted on the back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 are provided. Since the right rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 can be easily combined, it can be easily arranged on the front surface of the swivel table 3380. Through the left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, a plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410, back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510, back back left drive motor 3431 and back back right drive motor 3531 can be attached. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect.

  In addition, a main effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the unit base 3361, and an opening 3361b and a through-hole that penetrate the unit base 3361 and the turntable 3380 larger than the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the front-rear direction. 3382, and the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the opening 3361b of the unit base 3361 and the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380. The player can entertain the effect image displayed on the display device 1600. Further, when the turning table 3380 is rotated by the back rear turning drive motor 3370, a plurality of back back left rotating decorations 3410 attached to the turning table 3380 via the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 and the back The entire rear right rotating decorative body 3510 turns around the main effect display device 1600 around the main effect display device 1600, and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies. The player can be entertained by the movement of the entire 3510 turning around the main effect display device 1600, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the main effect display device 1600 that displays the effect image is provided, for example, a plurality of back-rear-left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear-right rotation decorations depending on the movement of the character displayed on the main effect display device 1600. The body 3510 rotates around an axis extending in parallel with the surface of the game area 5a, or the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 swivel around the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to show the player an effect such as the effect, and by the effect that combines the effect image and the movements such as rotation and turning of the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 A variety of performances can be shown to the player, and the player can be more entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a plurality of guide bushes 3364 and guide rollers 3365 attached to the unit base 3361 can be attached to the turning table 3380 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear turning drive motor 3370 is provided. When the turning pinion gear 3373 is rotated via the drive gear 3371 and the turning transmission gear 3372, the turning table 3380 is rotated about the axis extending in the front-rear direction by the turning gear 3384 meshing with the turning pinion gear 3373. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be realized with certainty. Further, since the turning table 3380 is rotatably attached by the plurality of guide bushes 3364 and guide rollers 3365 that are in contact with the outer periphery of the turning table 3380, it is not necessary to provide a rotation shaft at the rotation center of the turning table 3380. The main effect display device 1600 can be surely arranged on the rear side of the turning table 3380, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since a plurality of guide pins 3363, a slide frame 3630, a rear upper back drive motor 3652, and the like as a turning restriction means for restricting the rotation of the turning table 3380 are provided, the turning table 3380 is rotated by the turning drive means. When the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531 in the stopped state, the plurality of back rear left rotating motors 3510 are rotated. Even if the turning table 3380 is rotated in the rotation direction by the vibration caused by the rotation of the decorative body 3410 and the back right rotation decorative body 3510, the rotation of the turning table 3380 can be restricted by the turning restriction means. Swings back and forth, and a plurality of rear back rotation decorations 3410 and back right rotation The entire decoration body 3510 can be prevented from making unstable movement, and the plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 can be rotated in a stable state. At the same time, the plurality of back-rear left rotation decorations 3410 and back-rear rotation decorations 3510 can be rotated without giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the rotation of the turning table 3380 can be restricted by the plurality of guide pins 3363, the slide frame 3630, the back rear upper drive motor 3652, and the like as the turning restricting means, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorations 3410 and the back The turning table 3380 can receive a rotation moment to rotate the turning table 3380 by the load of the rear right rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear left drive motor 3431, the back back right drive motor 3531, and the like. The rotation moment due to the loads of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510, the back rear left drive motor 3431, the back rear right drive motor 3531, etc. Force is applied to the turning table 3380 from the back turning drive motor 3370 It is not necessary, can be loaded on the back after the turning driving motor 3370 prevents such of the can be avoided interruption of the game due to an overload.

  Further, the back rear left decorative board 3421 and the back rear left rotated decorative body 3510 are rotated by rotating the turn table 3380 by the back rear turning drive motor 3370, and the back rear left decorative board 3421 and When the LED on the right back decorative substrate 3521 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player the arc-shaped light trajectory centered on the center of the turntable 3380 and to entertain the player. Further, when the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rotated by the back rear left driving motor 3431 and the back rear right driving motor 3531 while rotating the turning table 3380, the back rear left decorative board is obtained. 3421 and the back right-right decorative board 3521, the arc-shaped light trajectory caused by the light emission of the LEDs can be shown to the player as a comet-like movable light-emitting effect by blinking, so something good for the player. It can be thought that there is a thing, and it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In addition, driving from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 is transmitted to rotate the shaft part 3412 and the shaft part 3512 of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510. The back rear left drive rack 3434 and the back rear right drive rack 3534, the transmission gear member lower 3435, the transmission gear member lower 3535, the transmission gear member upper 3436, the transmission gear member upper 3536, the rotation gear 3437, the rotation gear 3537, etc. Since the drive mechanism is provided, the back back left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 are arranged at positions away from the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 by the rotation drive mechanism. The rear back left drive motor 3431 and the back rear right drive motor 3531 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to make the plurality of back rear rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 relatively conspicuous, and to the player, the plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and the back rear right decoration bodies 3510 It is possible to entertain decoration and movement (rotation) of the rotating decorative body 3510 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 can be arranged at positions away from the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510. Therefore, the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 are arranged at positions apart from the plurality of back back left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back back right rotation decoration bodies 3510 in the circumferential direction of the turning table 3380. Or arranged at a position close to the rotation center of the turning table 3380, a plurality of back rear left rotation decoration bodies 3410 and back rear right rotation decoration bodies 3510, back rear left drive motor 3431 and back rear right drive motor 3531. Can be brought closer to the center side of the turntable 3380, and a plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 351 are provided. And the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 can weaken the force of the rotational moment to rotate the turning table 3380, and the force for canceling the rotational moment can be weak. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the rear back turning drive motor 3370 that generates a canceling force, and to suppress the load on the back back turn drive motor 3370 from increasing and interrupting the game due to overload. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the drive from the back rear left drive motor 3431 and the back back right drive motor 3531 is transmitted via the back back left drive rack 3434, the back back right drive rack 3534, and the like to rotate. By making the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction as thin as possible by the back rear left drive rack 3434, the back back right drive rack 3534, etc., a plurality of back back left rotation decorations 3410 and back back right rotation decorations Since a space can be secured on the rear side of the 3510, the swivel table 3380 can be disposed in the space. Therefore, the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are rear rear. The structure attached to the swivel table 3380 via the left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 can be easily realized, and the above-described effects are achieved. It can be a dick machine 1. Further, other decorative bodies, members, and the like can be arranged behind the plurality of back rear left rotating decorative bodies 3410 and back rear right rotating decorative bodies 3510 (the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520). , You can entertain the player with a variety of productions.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 that are movable along the surface of the game area 5a in the game area 5a in the front view are disposed. In addition, the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear are located near the outer periphery of the game area 5a (near the outer periphery of the turning table 3380) away from the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501. A right slide drive motor 3566 is disposed. In this state, when the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 are rotated by the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 according to the game state of the game performed in the game area 5a, the drive pulley 3468 and The relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569 are rotated by the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the driving pulley 3568, and the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3471 wound around the relay pulley 3469 and the relay pulley 3569 are rotated. The pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e are rotated by the two belts 3571, and the slide disposed in the vicinity of the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 together with the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. Arm 346 Then, the slide arm 3565 rotates and the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c revolve, and the back and left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back and right movable decoration by the revolution of the sliding pin 3465c and the sliding pin 3565c. The body unit 3501 moves between a separation position and an approach position along the surface of the game area 5a as a predetermined production operation. As described above, even if the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back back right slide drive motor 3566 are arranged at positions away from the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501, the back back left Rotation from the slide drive motor 3466 and the rear back right slide drive motor 3566 is transmitted by the belt constituted by the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571, so that the rear back left movable decoration. Since the body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be moved, the back back left slide drive motor 3466 and the back back are located in the vicinity of the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decorative body unit 3501. There is no need to dispose the right slide drive motor 3566, and the back movable left movable decorative unit It is possible to easily secure a space around the preparative 3401 and back right rear movable decorative body unit 3501. Accordingly, in the space secured around the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501, other decorative bodies (back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 and back rear lower movable effect unit 3700) and effects are provided. By arranging the sub-effect display device 3640 or the like for displaying an image, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to make the body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 relatively large and conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly applied to the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. It can be attracted, and the stage back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be enjoyed. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  In addition, the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571 are used to transmit rotation from the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 to the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565. Since the belt has flexibility, the driving pulley 3468, the driving pulley 3568, and the pulley portion are compared with the case where the belt is transmitted through a plurality of gears as in the prior art. By reducing the diameters of the 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, the distance between the forward path side and the return path side of the belt can be narrowed, and the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 and the back rear left The width between the movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 (the rotation is transmitted). It is possible to reduce the width) of the order of the route.

  Furthermore, the second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568, Since it extends along the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the rotation from the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 arranged at a position near the outer periphery of the game area 5a is difficult. It can be reliably transmitted to the slide arm 3465 and the slide arm 3565, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, a relay pulley 3469 and a relay pulley 3569 are provided near the outer periphery of the game area 5a between the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e, and are wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. The second belt 3471 and the second belt 3571 and the first pulley 3470 and the first belt 3570 wound around the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568 extend along the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Even if these belts extend along the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be non-linear (character-shaped), the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571 are wound around each other. Like a straight line extending between the pulleys As compared with the case where one belt is wound around the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e and the driving pulley 3468 and the driving pulley 3568, a lateral force does not act on each belt. The belt can be made difficult to come off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 from moving due to the disengagement of the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571. Therefore, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 are surely moved, and the player moves the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501. It is possible to entertain the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  The rotation from the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back rear right slide drive motor 3566 is transmitted through the first belt 3470, the first belt 3570, the second belt 3471, and the second belt 3571. The increase in the number of components between the back rear left slide drive motor 3466 and the back back right slide drive motor 3566 and the back back left movable decorative body unit 3401 and back back right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be suppressed. Even if the back rear left movable production unit 3400 and the back rear right production production unit 3500 of this configuration are provided, an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, and the back rear left movable production unit 3400 of this configuration can be easily achieved. And the pachinko machine 1 provided with the back right-right movable effect unit 3500 can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back back left movable effect unit 3400 and the back back right attached to the turning table 3380 in the back back center movable effect unit 3350 of the back unit 3000. The back rear left base unit 3420 and the back rear left base 3520 of the back rear left movable decoration body unit 3501 are separated by the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 of the movable effect unit 3500. In the position state, the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 together with the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are positioned outside the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380, respectively. Therefore, the main effect display device 160 through the through-hole 3382 The entire display screen can be seen from the front side, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be shown in a good state to the player, and the effect image can be enjoyed. .

  On the other hand, when the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are brought into the close position by the back back left slide unit 3460 and the back back right slide unit 3560, the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 together. Since the rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are positioned inside the through-hole 3382 of the turning table 3380, the back rear left base 3420, the back rear right base 3520, and the back rear left rotation The left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are blocked from the front side by the decorative body 3410 and the back-right rotation decorative body 3510, and the effect image displayed on the display screen is difficult to see. The back back left rotating decoration body 3410 attached to the front side of the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 Can be attracted to the right and left back rotated decorative body 3510, and something is good for the player by blocking the effect image by the back rear left rotated decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotated decorative body 3510. It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  The turntable 3380 to which the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are attached via the back back left slide unit 3460 and the back back right slide unit 3560 rotates around the main effect display device 1600 (center). Therefore, by rotating the swivel table 3380, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 (the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear) that move between the approach position and the separation position. The moving direction of the right base 3520, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401, and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) can be freely changed in a horizontal direction, a vertical direction, an oblique direction, etc. Main body display device with a rear rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and a rear rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 from the right direction. It can be moved to a closer position where the 600 front side. Further, the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotating decoration body 3510 in the back back left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back back right movable decoration body unit 3501 are respectively a back back left base 3420 and a back back. Since it is attached to the rear right base 3520 so as to be movable (rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the display screen of the main effect display device 1600), the front side of the rear rear left base 3420 and the rear rear right base 3520 The back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 can also be moved (rotated). Further, since the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right decorative board 3521 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are provided on each of the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, the back back left decorative board 3421 and The LED on the back back right decorative board 3521 can appropriately decorate the back back left rotated decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotated decorative body 3510 with light emission. Therefore, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decoration body 3510 move between the approach position and the separation position together with the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, or by the turning table 3380. It can rotate around the main effect display device 1600 together with the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, and can move (rotate) with respect to the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520. At the same time, the back and left decorative substrate 3421 and the back and right decorative substrate 3521 can be used for light emission decoration, so that various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining these movements and light emission decoration. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 are moved to the separated position together with the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520, the main effect display device 1600 in the front view. The back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 can be seen on both sides so as to sandwich the outer side, so that the main effect display device is provided by the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510. A part of the outer periphery of 1600 can be decorated to improve the appearance. When the turntable 3380 is rotated in the separated position, the back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 rotate around the main effect display device 1600, and thus the main effect display device 1600 The back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 (the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501) rotating around the main effect display device 1600 are opened and closed. By doing so, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained by the movement of the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501 rotating around the main effect display device 1600. At the same time, the player's interest is seen between the back rear left movable ornament body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable ornament body unit 3501. That the main effect display can be strongly attracted to effect image device 1600, a drop in interest to delight effect image can be suppressed. Alternatively, when the rear back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510 are moved (rotated) with respect to the back rear left base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 to which they are respectively attached in the separated position. The player can entertain the player by moving the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-rear rotation right decoration body 3510 decorating a part of the outer periphery of the main effect display device 1600.

  Further, when the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotating decoration body 3510 are moved between the approach position and the separation position via the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520, the back back left A force is applied from the back rear left slide unit 3460 and the back rear right slide unit 3560 to the center portion in the longitudinal direction (perpendicular to the moving direction) of the base 3420 and the back rear right base 3520 to Since the back back right base 3520 is moved, the back back left base 3420 and back back are changed in the state where the direction of movement of the back back left base 3420 and back back right base 3520 is changed by the rotation of the turning table 3380. Even if the right base 3520 is moved, the force for moving the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 is increased. By acting near the position of the center of gravity of the back rear right base 3520, the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 can be made difficult to tilt from the correct posture, and the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 are smooth. Can be moved to. Accordingly, the rear back left base 3420 and the rear rear right base 3520 and the rear rear right base 3520 are smoothly moved without rattling regardless of the orientation of the back rear left base 3520 and the rear rear right base 3520 due to the rotation of the turning table 3380. The back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be moved between the approach position and the separation position together with the 3520, so that the player can rotate the back left without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. The decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be moved, and the movement of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the back and back left decorative board 3421 and the back and back right decorative board 3521 and the back and back left rotating decoration body 3410 attached to the front side of the back and back left base 3520 and the back and back right base 3520 and the back side Since the back right rotating decorative body 3510 can be decorated with light emission, the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are formed by the light emitting decoration of the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510. Since it can be made conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and back back by the light emitting decoration. The appearance of the right rotating decorative body 3510 can be improved.

  Further, in the state of separation, the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are illuminated and illuminated by the LEDs of the back back left decorative board 3421 and the back back right decorative board 3521. By focusing on the left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510, and then moving the back rear left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3510 from the separation position to the approach position, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to overlook the movement of the back-rear left rotation ornament 3410 and the back-rear right rotation ornament 3510. Alternatively, with the rotation of the swivel table 3380 stopped, the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are illuminated with the LEDs of the back back left decoration board 3421 and the back back right decoration board 3521. In this state, the player is focused on the back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510, and then the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are rotated by the rotation of the turning table 3380. Is rotated around the main effect display device 1600 so that it is difficult for the player to overlook the rotation of the back rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3510. Therefore, by decorating the back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 with light emission decoration, the movement and rotation of the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 can be surely shown and enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the back back left rotating decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotating decoration body 3510 are attached to the back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 which are longer than the short side of the square main effect display device 1600, Since the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be hidden by the back rear left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 in addition to the back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510, the main effect display device The back back left base 3420 and the back back right base 3520 have a function of concealing 1600, and the function of decorating the concealed front side in the main effect display device 1600 has a back back left rotation decoration body 3410 and a back back right rotation decoration body. By providing it to 3510, a three-dimensional back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and a back-rear right rotation decoration body 3510 with more depth are provided. Door can be. Accordingly, since the front side of the main effect display device 1600 is concealed by the three-dimensionally formed back-and-back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-and-back right rotating decorative body 3510 having a depth, it is viewed on a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to show the player the performance that was not possible, and to give a strong impact to the player. Further, since the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 have a three-dimensional shape with a depth, the back back left rotating decorative body 3410 and the back back right rotating decorative body 3510 are arranged at the separation position. In the stopped state, the player has an illusion that the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-rear rotation rotation decoration body 3510 are general decoration members that decorate the game area 5a in front view. Can be made. Then, if the back left rotation decoration body 3410 and the back back right rotation decoration body 3510 are moved to the approach position or rotated by the turning table 3380 in a state where the player has an illusion, the player may be surprised. Can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the turning table 3380 of the back rear center movable effect unit 3350 in the back rear movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is rotated to be arranged at the center in the front view game area 5a. The sub-effect display device 3640 of the back-upper movable movable effect unit 3600 can be pivoted around the center of the main effect display device 1600 that is being operated, and the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the center of the main effect display device 1600. The sub-effect display device 3640 can be arranged in various places with respect to the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3640 can provide various effects. Can be presented.

  More specifically, in the turning direction of the sub effect display device 3640 (turning table 3380), a plurality of specific turning positions (here, the first turning position, the first turning position) by a plurality of guide pins 3363 projecting forward from the unit base 3361. Three turning positions, ie, two turning positions and a third turning position), and the sub-effect display device 3640 can be moved to the retreat position farthest from the turning center only at any one of the specific turning positions. In the state where the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retreat position, the sub effect display device 3640 is farthest from the center of the main effect display device 1600, so the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed by the sub effect display device 3640. The display screen of the main effect display device 1600 can be made conspicuous by displaying almost the entire display screen of the main effect display device 1600 from the player side. Can entertain the player. In this state, since the sub effect display device 3640 is positioned so as to be adjacent to the main effect display device 1600, the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 form one screen. By displaying, a large effect image combining the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can be shown to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the powerful effect image.

  When the sub effect display device 3640 is in the retracted position, the range of the turning angle of the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is restricted by the guide pin 3363 that contacts the sub effect display device 3640 (the slide frame 3630). Since the sub effect display device 3640 cannot be swung around, the sub effect display device 3640 is moved in the direction of the turning center (protruding position) to move the portion protruding outward from the turning table 3380 inward. Then, after the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released, the turning table 3380 is rotated to turn the sub effect display device 3640. Therefore, when the sub-effect display device 3640 in the reverse position is turned, the sub-effect display device 3640 turns once after moving in the direction of the turning center (projecting position). The player's interest can be attracted and attracted attention to the sub-effect display device 3640, and the turning of the sub-effect display device 3640 can be made difficult to miss. Then, in a state in which the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position and the restriction by the guide pin 3363 is released (a state within a turnable range), the turning table 3380 is rotated to turn the sub effect display device 3640. The effect image (for example, another character) displayed on the sub effect display device 3640 is rotating around the effect image (for example, a certain character) displayed on the main effect display device 1600. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player by an effect that has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines. In this state, when the sub effect display device 3640 is turned, when the effect image that forms one screen is displayed by the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640, the sub effect is displayed. As the display device 3640 turns, the outer shape of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 changes, so that the player can be wondered and attention can be paid to the effect image. Further, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640.

  With this sub-effect display device 3640 stopped turning, the revolving position side (the retreating position at the specific revolving position, or the turnable range in which the restriction by the guide pin 3363 approaching the retreating position side from the retreating position is released) If the sub-effect display device 3640 moves in a straight line toward the center, the player can be shown to the player. Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position side to the projecting position while turning, the player can be shown an effect in which the sub effect display device 3640 moves in an arc shape toward the center side. Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position side to the projecting position while reciprocating within a predetermined turning angle range, the sub effect display device 3640 is moved in a zigzag manner toward the center side. Can be shown to the player. Further, when the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the protruding position, the sub-effect display device 3640 can be turned to an arbitrary position with respect to the turning direction and then moved toward the protruding position. Therefore, the pattern of the movement (effect) in the direction in which the sub effect display device 3640 moves toward the turning center can be varied, and the player can be made less tired. Then, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the reverse position side to the protruding position, the sub effect display device 3640 approaches the turning center, and therefore moves to the front side of the main effect display device 1600. Half of the effect image displayed on the main effect display device 1600 can be blocked by the display device 3640, and the effect image is drawn by attracting the player's interest to the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device 3640. Can entertain. Further, since the sub effect display device 3640 can be moved from the protruding position to the retracted position side by making the movement opposite to that described above, more various effects can be shown to the player.

  In this way, since the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 can present various effects to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored, and to entertain and entertain the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, if the sub effect display device 3640 is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the effect image of the main effect display device 1600 is moved to the center side of the game area 5a in front view. It can give a strong impact on the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and can make the player think that there is something good. It can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, for example, in the case of a predetermined effect for causing the player to suggest a special lottery result that is selected by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the sub effect display device 3640 is displayed. By turning or moving to the projecting position, it is possible to make the player think that a special lottery result (for example, “big hit”) in which an advantageous gaming state occurs has been drawn, and the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 in which an effect suggesting the special lottery result is executed because of the above-described effects, the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3640 that can be suitably used are provided. A production unit can be provided.

  Further, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position at the specific turning position (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position), the turning of the sub effect display device 3640 is restricted by the guide pin 3363. Therefore, at the second turning position provided to the right of the turning center, a force for turning the sub effect display device 3640 (the turning table 3380) is applied by the weight of the sub effect display device 3640. However, since the force can be received by the guide pin 3363, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turn table 3380) freely turns downward while the sub effect display device 3640 stops turning at the second turning position. In the second turning position, the effect image by the sub effect display device 3640 can be displayed in a good state. Want to can. In addition, since the force for turning the sub effect display device 3640 can be received by the guide pin 3363, the sub effect display device 3640 (the turn table) is stopped while the sub effect display device 3640 is stopped turning at the second turning position. 3380) can be prevented from being subjected to a load, and interruption of the game due to overload can be avoided.

  Further, the guide pin 3363 protrudes forward from the unit base 3361 so as to be brought into contact with the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) in the retracted position so as to regulate the turning, and a plurality of guide pins 3363. , And the sub-effect display device 3640 is restricted in a range of different turning angles, respectively, by appropriately varying the protruding intervals of the plurality of specific turning positions (first turning position, second turning position, and third turning position). Therefore, depending on the specific turning position where the sub-effect display device 3640 is turned, the sub-effect display device 3640 cannot be turned by the guide pin 3363, or within a predetermined turning angle range. Can be reciprocally turned in the turning direction. More specifically, for example, at the second turning position, the two guide pins 3363 are spaced apart in the turning direction by substantially the same width as the slide frame 3630 to which the sub effect display device 3640 is attached, and the two guide pins 3363 are separated. When the sub-effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position so as to be inserted between the two parts, the part of the slide frame 3630 that protrudes outside the turning table 3380 is sandwiched between the two guide pins 3363. Sub-effect display device 3640 can be restricted (locked) so as not to turn. In addition, the distance between the two guide pins 3363 in the turning direction in the first turning position and the third turning position is wider than the width of the slide frame 3630 so that the guide pins 3363 are inserted between the two guide pins 3363. When the sub effect display device 3640 is moved to the retracted position, there is a gap having a predetermined width between the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) and the two guide pins 3363. Thus, the sub effect display device 3640 can be turned in the turning direction, and the sub effect display device 3640 can be restricted to turn only within a predetermined turning angle range. As described above, the sub effect display device 3640 can be disabled by the guide pin 3363 according to the specific turning position, or can be reciprocated in the turning direction within a predetermined turning angle range. Depending on the specific turning position where the effect display device 3640 is located, it is possible to show the player different movements in the turning direction, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with various effects, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition to the specific turning positions (the first turning position, the second turning position, and the third turning position), the slide frame 3630 to which the sub-effect display device 3640 is attached is set in the turning direction interval between the two guide pins 3363. Therefore, when the sub effect display device 3640 is moved in the direction of the retreat position at the turning position between the two guide pins 3363, the outer side of the slide frame 3630 becomes the guide pins 3363. The sub-effect display device 3640 does not enter between the two guide pins 3363. Therefore, even if another member is attached to a portion (a portion other than the specific turning position) between the two guide pins 3363 having a narrow interval, the sub-effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) does not come into contact. Since another member can be attached to the part, the back and rear turning drive motor 3370 for rotating the turning table 3380, the turning detection sensor 336, etc. can be attached to the part as the other member. The pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the effects can be reliably realized.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the back-back center movable effect unit 3350 of the back-back movable effect unit 3300, the swivel gear 3384 of the swivel table 3380 extends in an arc shape that does not go around, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of this, the swivel gear 3384 may extend in an annular shape. Thereby, the turntable 3380 can be freely rotated, and an effect that can be more enjoyed by the player can be provided.

  In the above embodiment, in the back rear movable effect unit 3300, the sub effect display device 3640 (slide frame 3630) of the back rear upper movable effect unit 3600 is moved to the protruding position side from the retracted position. When the back rear left movable decoration body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decoration body unit 3501 of the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 are moved from the separation position to the approach position, the slide frame 3630 is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the position of the sub effect display device 3640 between the retracted position and the protruding position, the back rear left movable decorative unit 3401 is displayed. And the back right-hand movable decorative body unit 3501 may be movable between the separation position and the approach position. As a result, the back rear left movable decorative body unit 3401 and the back rear right movable decorative body unit 3501 can be moved to the approach position regardless of the rotation angle position of the turning table 3380. Can be presented to the player.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the back rear left movable effect unit 3400 and the back rear right movable effect unit 3500 of the back rear movable effect unit 3300, between the drive pulley 3468 and the drive pulley 3568 and the pulley portion 3465e and the pulley portion 3565e. Are provided with one relay pulley 3469 and one relay pulley 3569, and are wound around a pulley portion 3465 e and a second belt 3571 and a second belt 3571 wound around the pulley portion 3565 e, and a driving pulley 3468 and a driving pulley 3568. Although two belts, the first belt 3470 and the first belt 3570, transmit the rotation, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive pulley 3468, the drive pulley 3568, the pulley portion 3465e, and the pulley portion 3565e Multiple relay pulleys in between On the, over sequentially winding the belt between the two pulleys in proximity, it may be caused to transmit the rotation through the three or more belts.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Main effect display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3300 Backward movable production unit 3350 Backward central movable production unit 3360 Fixed side unit 3380 Turning table 3400 Backward left movable production unit 3401 Backward left movable decorative body unit 3410 Backward rear left rotation decorative body (decoration body)
3410A First back rear left rotating decoration body 3410B Second back rear left rotation decoration body 3410C Third back rear left rotation decoration body 3410D Fourth back rear left rotation decoration body 3411 Decoration body main body 3412 Shaft 3420 Back rear left base (shutter )
3421 Back left decorative board (decorative board)
3426 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3427 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3429 Fourth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3431 Rear back left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3432 Drive gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3433 Relay gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3434 Back left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3434b Under working rack gear (working rack gear)
3434c Working rack gear on (working rack gear)
3435 Under transmission gear member (rotary drive mechanism)
3435a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3435c Transmission gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3436 On transmission gear member (rotary drive mechanism)
3436a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3436c Transmission gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3437 Rotating gear (rotational drive mechanism)
3450 Rotary coupling mechanism (universal shaft joint)
3451 Arm unit 3452 Spider 3352a Transmission unit 3460 Back rear left slide unit 3466 Back rear left slide drive motor (open / close drive means)
3500 Rear back right movable effect production unit 3501 Back rear right movable decorative body unit 3510 Back rear left rotation decorative body (decorative body)
3510A First back rear left rotation decoration 3510B Second back rear left rotation decoration 3510C Third back rear left rotation decoration 3510D Fourth back rear left rotation decoration 3511 Decoration body main body 3512 Shaft 3520 Back rear left base (shutter )
3521 Back left decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3526 First bearing cover (decorative cover)
3527 Second bearing cover (decorative cover)
3529 Fourth bearing cover (decorative cover)
3531 Back left drive motor (rotation drive means)
3534 Back left drive rack (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3534b Under working rack gear (working rack gear)
3534c On working rack gear (working rack gear)
3535 Below transmission gear member (rotary drive mechanism)
3535a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3535c Transmission gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3536 On transmission gear member (rotary drive mechanism)
3536a Driven gear (transmission mechanism, rotation drive mechanism)
3536c Transmission gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3537 Rotation Gear (Rotation Drive Mechanism)
3560 rear back right slide unit 3566 back rear right slide drive motor (open / close drive means)

Claims (1)

A game area where the game is played, and
Effect display means arranged in the center of the game area in front view and capable of displaying effect images;
On the front side of the effect display means, the game area is opposed to each other with the center of the game area in between, and the approach position positioned in front of the effect display means close to the center of the game area when viewed from the front A pair of shutters that are each independently movable between the separation position located outside the effect display means away from the center of the effect display means,
An opening / closing drive means for moving the pair of shutters between the approach position and the separation position according to a game state that is changed by a game being performed in the game area;
A decorative body main body formed in a three-dimensional manner, and a shaft portion that protrudes outward coaxially from a portion facing the back of the decorative body main body, and the shaft portions are adjacent to each other. A plurality of decorative bodies attached to the front surfaces of the pair of shutters so that each of the shaft portions can rotate in a state of being arranged in a non-linear manner,
In each of the pair of shutters, a universal joint coupling the shaft portions adjacent to each other of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged in a row so as to be able to transmit rotation,
A rotation driving unit that is attached to each of the pair of shutters and that rotates the shaft portion of at least one of the decorative bodies in each of the pair of shutters according to the gaming state; A featured gaming machine.

Images